Allen-Bradley ArmorStart 290E, ArmorStart 291E User Manual
Allen-Bradley ArmorStart 291E is a catalog number 291E distributed motor controller. This high-performance, cost-effective motor controller consists of an EtherNet/IP adapter with a built-in switch, an EtherNet scanner adapter, and a power flex 525 drive. It is designed to control up to four motors simultaneously. With the help of plug-and-play technology, users can easily set up and configure the controller using Rockwell Software’s Add-On Profile (AOP). Other than that, it also features an integrated safety relay, an LCD human interface module (HIM), and an embedded web server.
Advertisement
Advertisement
User Manual
ArmorStart® LT Distributed Motor Controller
Catalog Numbers 290E, 291E, 294E
Important User Information
Because of the variety of uses for the products described in this publication, those responsible for the application and use of this control equipment must satisfy themselves that all necessary steps have been taken to assure that each application and use meets all performance and safety requirements, including any applicable laws, regulations, codes and standards.
The illustrations, charts, sample programs and layout examples shown in this guide are intended solely for purposes of example. Since there are many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation does not assume responsibility or liability (to include intellectual property liability) for actual use based upon the examples shown in this publication.
Solid-state equipment has operational characteristics differing from those of electromechanical equipment.
Safety
Guidelines for the Application, Installation and Maintenance of Solid State Controls
(Publication SGI-1.1
available from your local Rockwell Automation sales office or online at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/ ) describes some important differences between solid-state equipment and hard-wired electromechanical devices. Because of this difference, and also because of the wide variety of uses for solid-state equipment, all persons responsible for applying this equipment must satisfy themselves that each intended application of this equipment is acceptable.
In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use or application of this equipment.
The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.
No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or software described in this manual.
Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation,
Inc., is prohibited.
Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.
WARNING:
Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous environment, which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
ATTENTION:
Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.
SHOCK HAZARD:
Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous voltage may be present.
BURN HAZARD:
Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may reach dangerous temperatures.
IMPORTANT
Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.
General Precautions
In addition to the precautions listed throughout this manual, the following statements, which are general to the system, must be read and understood.
ATTENTION:
This manual is intended for qualified service personnel responsible for setting up and servicing these devices. The user must have previous experience with and a basic understanding of electrical terminology, configuration procedures, required equipment, and safety precautions.
WARNING:
The National Electrical Code (NEC), NFPA79, and any other governing regional or local code will overrule the information in this manual. Rockwell Automation cannot assume responsibility for the compliance or proper installation of the
ArmorStart LT or associated equipment. A hazard of personal injury and/or equipment damage exists if codes are ignored during installation.
ATTENTION:
The controller contains ESD (electrostatic discharge) sensitive parts and assemblies. Static control precautions are required when installing, testing, servicing, or repairing the assembly. Component damage may result if ESD control procedures are not followed. If you are not familiar with static control procedures, refer to Publication 8000-4.5.2
, Guarding against Electrostatic Discharge, or any other applicable ESD protection handbooks.
ATTENTION:
Only personnel familiar with the controller and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation, startup, and subsequent maintenance of the system. Failure to do this may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage.
Precautions for Bulletin 294E Applications
ATTENTION:
Only qualified personnel familiar with adjustable frequency AC drives and associated machinery should plan or implement the installation, startup, and subsequent maintenance of the system. Failure to do this may result in personal injury and/or equipment damage.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
3
4
Software Requirements
The table lists the versions of software that are required.
Software Version
RSLinx Classic 2.56 or later
RSLogix 5000
BOOTP/DHCP
17.01 or later
Download the most current version of the Add-On Profile from http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/downloads.html
.
Version 2.3 or later
Additional Resources
These documents and websites contain additional information concerning related Rockwell Automation products.
You can view or download publications at http:/www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/ . To order paper copies of technical documentation, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automation sales representative.
Table 1 - Rockwell Automation Industrial Network Resources
Resource
http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Networks-and-Communications http://ab.rockwellautomation.com/Networks-and-Communications/Ethernet-IP-
Network http://www.rockwellautomation.com/services/networks/ http://www.rockwellautomation.com/services/security/ http://www.ab.com/networks/architectures.html
EtherNet/IP Embedded Switch Technology Application Guide, Publication ENET-AP005
Description
Rockwell Automation networks and communication website
Rockwell Automation EtherNet/IP website
Rockwell Automation network and security services websites
EtherNet/IP Network Configuration User Manual, Publication ENET-UM001
Education series webcasts for IT and controls professionals
Describes how to install, configure, and maintain linear and device-level Ring (DLR) networks using Rockwell Automation EtherNet/IP devices with embedded switch technology.
Describes how to configure and use EtherNet/IP communication modules with a
Logix5000 controller and communicate with various devices on the Ethernet network.
EtherNet Design Consideration, Publication ENET-RM002A-EN-P Provides details on ethernet design and infrastructure.
EtherNet/IP Modules in Logix5000 Control Systems User Manual, Publication ENET-UM001 Provides details about how to configure your module.
EtherNet/IP Embedded Switch Technology Application Guide, Publication ENET-AP005
EtherNet/IP Industrial Protocol White Paper, Publication ENET-WP001
Provides information about using products with embedded switch technology to construct networks with linear and ring topologies.
Describes how to implement services and data objects on a TCP/UDP/IP based Ethernet network.
Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, Publication 1770-4.1
Wiring and Grounding Guidelines, (PWM) AC Drives, Publication DRIVES-IN001
Product Certifications website, http://www.rockwellautomation.com/products/certification/
Provides general guidelines for installing a Rockwell Automation industrial system.
Describes wiring and grounding guidelines for Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) AC Drives
Provides declarations of conformity, certificates, and other certification details.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Table 2 - ODVA Resources
Resource
http://www.odva.org/
Description
Open DeviceNet Vendors Association (ODVA) website http://www.odva.org/default.aspx?tabid=54
Ethernet Media Planning and Installation Manual, ODVA publication http://www.odva.org/Portals/0/Library/Publications_Numbered/
PUB00148R0_EtherNetIP_Media_Planning_and_Installation_Manual.pdf
Network Infrastructure for EtherNet/IP: Introduction and Considerations, ODVA publication http://www.odva.org/Portals/0/Library/Publications_Numbered/
PUB00035R0_Infrastructure_Guide.pdf
The CIP Advantage website
•
CIP features and benefits
•
How to get started
Describes the required media components and how to plan for, install, verify, troubleshoot, and certify an Ethernet network.
Provides an overview of the technologies used in EtherNet/IP networks and provides guidelines for deploying infrastructure devices in EtherNet/IP networks.
Table 3 - Product Selection Resources
Resource
Industrial Controls catalog website, http://www.ab.com/catalogs/
ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controller Selection Guide, Publication 290-SG001
Description
Industrial Controls catalog website
Product selection guide
Table 4 - Cisco and Rockwell Automation Alliance Resources
Resource
http://www.ab.com/networks/architectures.html
Converged Plantwide Ethernet (CPwE) Design and Implementation Guide, Publication
ENET-TD001
Description
Rockwell Automation and Cisco Systems reference architecture website
Represents a collaborative development effort from Rockwell Automation and Cisco
Systems. The design guide is built on, and adds to, design guidelines from the Cisco
Ethernet-to-the-Factory (EttF) solution and the Rockwell Automation Integrated
Architecture. The design guide focuses on the manufacturing industry.
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products. At http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/ , you can find technical manuals, a knowledge base of FAQs, technical and application notes, sample code and links to software service packs, and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools.
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation, contact Customer Support.
United States or Canada
Outside United States or
Canada
1.440.646.3434
Use the Worldwide Locator at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/ americas/phone_en.html
, or contact your local Rockwell Automation representative.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
5
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility. However, if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned, follow these procedures.
United States
Outside United States
Contact your distributor. You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process.
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure.
6
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
New and Updated
Information
Summary of Changes
This table contains the changes made to this revision.
Topic
Added source brake and IPS specifications
Page
Various
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
7
Summary of Changes
Notes:
8
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Preface
European Communities (EC)
Directive Compliance
If this product has the CE mark it is approved for installation within the
European Union and European Economic Area (EEA). It has been designed and tested to meet the following directives.
Low Voltage and EMC
Directives
This product is tested to meet the European Union (EU) Council 2006/95/EC
Low Voltage Directive and the EU Council 2004/108/EC Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC) Directive by applying the following standard(s):
•
Bulletin 290E_/291E_: EN 60947-4-1 — Low-voltage switchgear and controlgear — Part 4-1: Contactors and motor-starters — Electromechanical contactors and motor-starters.
•
Bulletin 294E_: EN 61800-3 — Adjustable speed electronic power drive systems — Part 3: EMC product standard including specific test methods
EN 61800-5-1:2003 — Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems —
Part 5-1: Safety requirements — Electrical, thermal and energy.
This product is intended for use in an industrial environment.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
9
Preface
Introduction
The ArmorStart LT is an integrated, pre-engineered, motor starting solution designed for use in material handling applications. ArmorStart LT is the latest addition to the ArmorStart portfolio. ArmorStart LT is a leader in the market place given its compact size and high performance features in network, I/O, and motor control. This manual will guide you through the features and functionality when installing the product. Thank you for choosing ArmorStart LT for your distributed motor control needs. If you have any questions please refer to the
“Support Section” for contact information.
10
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Product Overview
Table of Contents
Summary of Changes
Preface
European Communities (EC) Directive Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Chapter 1
Standard Features Across Product Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Group Motor Installations for USA and Canada Markets. . . . . . . . 27
Mode of Operation Bulletin 290E/291E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Mode of Operation Bulletin 294E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Sensorless Vector Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Electronic Data Sheet (EDS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Optional HOA Selector Keypad. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Optional HOA Keypad Configuration (Bulletin 290E/291E only). . . 35
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
11
Table of Contents
Installation and Wiring
12
Keypad Disable Parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Source Brake Contactor and Connector (Bulletin 294E only) . . . . . . . . 38
Chapter 2
Precautions for Bulletin 290E/291E Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Precautions for Bulletin 294E Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Branch Circuit Protection Requirements for ArmorConnect
Three-Phase Power Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Group Motor Installations for USA and Canada Markets. . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Cable Workmanship Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Hand Operation (HOA) Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Grounding Safety Grounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Grounding PE or Ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Delta/Wye with Grounded Wye Neutral . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Bulletin 294 Motor Cable Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Recommended Cable Connectors/Glands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Recommended Cord Grips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Shield Terminating Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
General Notes (Bulletin 294E only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Ethernet, DeviceNet, and I/O Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Product Commissioning
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E
Programmable Parameters
Table of Contents
DeviceNet Connector (M18) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
ArmorConnect Power Media Receptacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Chapter 3
Configuring EtherNet/IP Address. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Manually Configure the Network Address Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Using the Rockwell Automation BootP/DHCP Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Parameter Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
E-mail Notification Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
How to Add a New Module Using the Add-On Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
HOA Keypad Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Source Brake, Electro-Mechanical Brake Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Chapter 4
ArmorStart LT EtherNet/IP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Parameter Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Basic Configuration Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Starter Protection Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
User I/O Configuration Group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Miscellaneous Configuration Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Advanced Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Motor and Control Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
13
Table of Contents
Diagnostics
Specifications
User I/O Configuration Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Miscellaneous Configuration Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Advanced Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Chapter 5
Quick Reference Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Bulletin 290E/291E Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Chapter 6
Bulletin 100-K/104-K Life-Load Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Motor Overload Trip Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Applying More Than One ArmorStart
LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch
Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Appendix A
Multiple-Motor Branch Circuits and Motor Controllers Listed for Group
Complete Text - . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Input and Output Conductors of Bulletin 290E and 291E
Input and Output Conductors of Bulletin 294E Controllers (b). . . . . 191
Combined Load Conductors (c) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
CIP Information
Appendix B
Product Codes and Name Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
CIP Explicit Connection Behavior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
CLASS CODE 0x0001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
14
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Table of Contents
CLASS CODE 0x0002 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
CLASS CODE 0x0004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
CLASS CODE 0x0006 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
CLASS CODE 0x0008 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
CLASS CODE 0x0009 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Discrete Output Point Object Special Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 207
(Implemented in Bulletin 294E units only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
(Implemented in Bulletin 294E units only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
CLASS CODE 0x000F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
CLASS CODE 0x0010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
CLASS CODE 0x001D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
CLASS CODE 0x001E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
CLASS CODE 0x0029 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
CLASS CODE 0x002C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Device Level Ring (DLR) Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
CLASS CODE 0x0047 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
CLASS CODE 0x0064 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
CLASS CODE 0x0097 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
CLASS CODE 0x0098 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
CLASS CODE 0x00F5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
CLASS CODE 0x00F6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Trip and Warning Email Object. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
CLASS CODE 0x0376 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
15
Table of Contents
Using DeviceLogix
Appendix C
DeviceLogix Programming Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
ArmorStart LT Bulletin 294E Example Configuration. . . . . . . . . . 236
Use of the AOP in RSLogix 5000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
16
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Description
Chapter
1
Product Overview
ArmorStart LT is available with Full Voltage, Full Voltage Reversing, or Variable
Speed motor control performance. It comes equipped with a UL Listed At-motor disconnect that supports a lock-out tag-out (LOTO) provision. ArmorStart LT is listed as suitable for group installations per UL and can be applied with either branch circuit breaker protection or fuse protection. It provides a robust IP66/
UL Type 4/12
➊
enclosure suitable for water washdown environments in a single box construction that will minimize inventory needs. All external connections are made from the bottom of the unit minimizing accidental contact by moving equipment. ArmorStart LT as a standard will come with quick disconnect receptacles for the I/O and network connections. And finally, ArmorStart LT will include DeviceLogix, a high-performing local logic engine when a fast I/O response is critical to the application.
ArmorStart LT leverages the capabilities of the Rockwell Automation® Integrated
Architecture so you can achieve an unmatched level of integration and ease of use. The architecture of ArmorStart LT allows Premiere Integration with
Allen-Bradley® ControlLogix® or CompactLogix™ line of Automation Controllers and PLCs. RSLogix™ 5000 is the only programming tool needed which consolidates controller programming, device configuration, and maintenance into a single, integrated environment. ArmorStart LT includes tools such as an
Add-on Profile that will automatically generate PLC tag names for quick and efficient configuration and programming.
The ArmorStart LT is available with options that can further reduce installation and commissioning time and cost
, such as:
•
Quick disconnect receptacles for power, control, and motor connections
•
Local Hand-Off-Auto keypad for manual control
•
Internal power supply (IPS) eliminating the need to run additional control power to each unit
•
Bulletin 294 can be ordered with an electromechanical brake connection
(source brake)
•
EDS Tag Generator tool with RS Logix 5000
➊
The G2 gland option is rated IP66/ UL Type 4
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
17
Chapter 1
Product Overview
Features
The ArmorStart LT provides many features and benefits that are unsurpassed in the market place:
•
Robust IP66, UL Type 4/12 enclosure
•
UL Listed, Suitable for Group Motor Applications
•
UL Listed, At-motor disconnect switch
•
Native support for EtherNet/IP
•
Embedded dual port ethernet switch
•
Device Level Ring (DLR) with Beacon frame performance
•
IEEE 1588 Transparent Clock
•
RSLogix 5000 Add-On Profile
•
6 user configurable I/O points
•
DeviceLogix
•
Embedded web server support
•
Configurable e-mail response for fault or alarm events
•
Optional internal power supply
•
Optional electromechanical brake contactor
•
Optional local control via Hand-Off-Auto keypad
•
Optional quick disconnect for power and motor connections
IMPORTANT
Not all options are available for Bulletin 290E/291E/294E. Refer to the catalog configurator for details.
18
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Feature Description
Product Overview
Chapter 1
Standard Features Across Product Family
UL Listed “Suitable for Group Motor Applications”
— Where NFPA 70
(NEC) or 79 are required installation standards, this Listing allows two or more motors to be connected to the same branch circuit without individual motor branch short circuit or ground fault protection. Refer to Appendix A for details.
At-motor disconnect switch
— ArmorStart LT offers a local ON/OFF motor disconnecting means with lockout-tagout provision. Industrial standards require a local at-motor disconnect to be within eye sight of the motor for maintenance or other shutdown reasons. Refer to your installation code for details.
User configurable I/O
— ArmorStart LT offers 6 user configurable I/O points to be used with sensors and actuators. By default all 6 points are configured as sinking 24V DC inputs. The user has the option to select any point as a sourcing
24V DC output.
RSLogix 5000 Add-On Profile (AOP)
— ArmorStart LT offers for
Allen-Bradley ControlLogix or CompactLogix PLCs a downloadable Add-On
Profile. The AOP simplifies setup and commissioning via predefined tags and commissioning wizards. The AOP also allows copy and paste functionality for quick setup and configuration of multiple ArmorStart LTs.
IMPORTANT
AOP support for EtherNet/IP network
only
and requires RSLogix 5000 revision 17.01 or later. There is a known compatibility issue with revision 20.0.
Update RSLogix 5000 to 20.1 or greater.
DeviceLogix
— ArmorStart LT offers local programmable logic via
DeviceLogix. DeviceLogix is a stand-alone program that resides within the
ArmorStart LT. It is programmed locally using the Add-On-Profile and implements operations such as, AND, OR, NOT, Timers, Counters, Latches, and Analog operations. DeviceLogix can run as a stand-alone application, independent of the network or collaboratively with the PLC. However, unswitched control power must be maintained for DeviceLogix to operate.
Quick disconnect for I/O and network
— ArmorStart LT offers quick disconnect connectors for I/O and communications.
EtherNet/IP node address
— ArmorStart LT offers external accessible address switches for device node address configuration. The address can be set statically or dynamically.
EMI filter
— ArmorStart LT for VFD application (Bulletin 294) provides an internal EMI filter and is CE compliant. For CE compliant installations refer to the recommended EMI/RFI cord grip accessory. For availability of the quick disconnect shielded motor cable contact your local sales representative for details.
Local and remote status and diagnostics
— ArmorStart LT offers comprehensive status and diagnostics for I/O, Network, and device health via 12
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
19
Chapter 1
Product Overview
Network Options
LEDs found on the electronic control module (ECM). If a fault occurs a local fault reset button allows the user to quickly get the process started after corrective action is taken. The user can also configure the embedded webserver to send an email when a fault or warning occurs.
Gland plate entrance
— ArmorStart LT offers different methods of connecting three-phase, control power, and motor. ArmorStart LT has conduit entrance openings, as standard.
Native EtherNet/IP
— ArmorStart LT supports native EtherNet/IP without additional modules or adapters. EtherNet/IP allows complete integration of control with information across multiple Common Industrial Protocol (CIP™) networks. EtherNet/IP allows users to integrate I/O control, device configuration, and data collection across multiple networks enabling internet connectivity and information.
Embedded dual port switch
— ArmorStart LT EtherNet/IP version includes a dual port 10/100 mb/s ethernet switch that supports linear or Device Level Ring
(DLR) topology.
Figure 1 - Linear Topology
Device Level Ring (DLR)
- ArmorStart LT EtherNet/IP version offers DLR support with beacon frame performance. DLR provides a single fault tolerant network solution for EtherNet/IP.
Figure 2 - DLR with Beacon Performance — No Fault
20
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Figure 3 - DLR with Beacon Performance — Fault
Product Overview
Chapter 1
In this example the fault is precisely identified by the link status message and the supervisor opens the blocked port to allow network traffic to continue normally.
IEEE 1588 transparent clock
—ArmorStart LT EtherNet/IP version supports the IEEE 1588 transparent clock when used with precision time protocols
(PTP). A transparent clock measures and adjusts for packet delays, therefore removing the negative effects that these variations can cause within a synchronized distributed network of devices.
Embedded web server
— ArmorStart LT EtherNet/IP version offers a web server that can be accessed via a standard internet browser. The web server provides status, diagnostics, and configuration capabilities.
E-mail notification
— ArmorStart LT via the embedded web server, supports configuration of the Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP). Once properly configured, the motor controller will e-mail the user with specific fault/trip messages.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
21
Chapter 1
Product Overview
Factory-Installed Options
Internal power supply (IPS)
— ArmorStart LT offers the user an optional
24V DC internal power supply. The internal power supply provides all control and I/O power needs and is sourced from the incoming 3-phase power. This eliminates the need to run separate control power to each unit, reducing installation time and cost. The local at-motor disconnect will remove power from the motor terminals and outputs when in the OFF condition.
Hand/Off/Auto (HOA) keypad
— ArmorStart LT offers an optional local
Hand-Off-Auto keypad. This key pad allows local start/stop motor control regardless of PLC status. This option can be used for troubleshooting or maintenance operations. The HOA can also be disabled when local control is not allowed, using parameter 67.
Source brake
— ArmorStart LT provides an optional, internally-controlled electromechanical motor brake contactor. The motor brake power is sourced from 3-phase power, L1 and L2.
Quick disconnect gland
— ArmorStart LT offers a plug -n- play solution that simplifies wiring and installation. These factory installed quick disconnect receptacles provide connectivity to ArmorConnect® media for three-phase, control, and motor connections. The cables are ordered separately.
22
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Product Overview
Chapter 1
ArmorStart LT Characteristics
Figure 4 - Bulletin 290E/291E ArmorStart LT
0
Off
On/Off Switch
1
On
LockOut/TagOut Provision
HOA Keypad (optional)
IP Address Switches
Status and Diagnostic LEDs
Reset
ECM (Electronic
Control Module)
6 Configurable I/Os
Wiring Access
Dual Port EtherNet/IP
(This is replaced by a DeviceNet connector, when DeviceNet communication is selected)
Protective Earth (PE)
Gland Plate – Conduit/Cord Grip or
ArmorConnect
®
Media (optional)
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
23
Chapter 1
Product Overview
Catalog Number Explanation
Examples given in this section are for reference purposes. This basic explanation should not be used for product selection; not all combinations will produce a valid catalog number.
290
—
a
E F
— —
b c
A
—
d
Z - G1 - Option 1 - Option 2
— — —— ——
e f g h
Code
290
291
a
Bulletin Number
Description
Full-Voltage Starter
Reversing Starter
Code
Z
P
e
Control Voltage
Description
External 24V DC control power
Internal power supply
Code
E
D
b
Communications
Description
EtherNet/IP
DeviceNet
Code
G1
G2
G3
f
Gland Plate Options
(Power and Motor)
Description
Conduit entry
ArmorConnect
Gland Kits
➋
Code
F
c
Enclosure Type
Description
UL Type 4/12
➊
Code
3
3FR
g
Option 1
Description
Hand/Off/Auto selector keypad
Hand/Off/Auto selector keypad with
Forward/Reverse
Code
A
B
d
Overload Selection
Description
0.25…3.5 A
1.1…7.6 A
Code blank
➌
h
Option 2
Description
No option
➊
IP66/UL Type 4 is available with all gland options. UL Type 4/12 is available with G1 and G3 gland option.
➋
See selection guide 290-SG001_-EN-P Accessories section for gland configurations and ordering.
➌
Leave blank unless there is a customer-specific option defined by the factory.
24
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Product Overview
Chapter 1
ArmorStart LT Characteristics
0
Off
On/Off Switch
1
On
Figure 5 - Bulletin 294E ArmorStart LT
Wiring Access
LockOut/TagOut Provision
Gland Plate – Conduit/Cord Grip or
ArmorConnect Media (optional)
Hand-Off-Auto
Keypad (optional)
Reset
IP Address Switches Status and Diagnostic LEDs
ECM (Electronic Control Module)
6 Configurable I/Os
Protective Earth (PE)
Bottom View
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Dual Port EtherNet/IP
(This is replaced by a DeviceNet connector, when DeviceNet communication is selected)
25
Chapter 1
Product Overview
Catalog Number Explanation
Examples given in this section are for reference purposes. This basic explanation should not be used for product selection; not all combinations will produce a valid catalog number.
294
—
a
E F
— —
b c
D1P5
—
d
Z - G1 - Option 1 - Option 2
— — —— ——
e f g h
Code
294
a
Bulletin Number
Description
VFD Starter
Code
Z
P
e
Control Voltage
Description
External 24V DC control power
Internal power supply
Code
E
D
b
Communications
Description
EtherNet/IP
DeviceNet
Code
G1
G2
G3
f
Gland Plate Options
(Power and Motor)
Description
Conduit entry
ArmorConnect
Gland kits
➋
Code
F
c
Enclosure Type
Description
UL Type 4/12
➊
Code
3
g
Option 1
Description
Hand/Off/Auto selector keypad with Jog function
Code
D1P5
D2P5
D4P2
d
Output Current
Description
1.5 A (0.4 kW), 0.5 Hp
2.5 A (0.75 kW), 1.0Hp
3.6 A (1.5 kW), 2.0Hp
Code
SB blank
➌
➊
IP66/UL Type 4 is available with all gland options. UL Type 4/12 is available with G1 and G3 gland option.
➋
See selection guide 290-SG001_-EN-P Accessories section for gland configurations and ordering.
➌
Leave blank unless there is a customer-specific option defined by the factory.
h
Option 2
Description
Source Brake
No option
26
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Basic Operation
Product Overview
Chapter 1
Group Motor Installations for USA and Canada Markets
The ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor controllers are listed for use with each other in group installations per NFPA 79, Electrical Standard for Industrial
Machinery and NFPA 70, the National Electrical Code. When applied according to the group motor installation requirements, two or more motors are permitted on a single branch circuit. Group Motor Installation has been successfully used for many years in the USA and Canada.
Note:
For additional information regarding group motor installations with the
ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controller, see
Control Circuit
ArmorStart LT accepts a 24V DC Class 2 input power supply for switched and unswitched power. The control voltage provides power to the inputs
(unswitched) and outputs (switched). Unswitched control voltage is used to ensure no loss of network connectivity, sensor, or other field input status under normal operation. The control power terminal connections are labeled A1, A2, and A3. Switched power is identified as (+A1) (-A2). Unswitched power is identified as (+A3) (-A2).
As an option, ArmorStart LT can be supplied with an internal power supply
(IPS) eliminating the need for an external control power. The IPS is sourced from the line side of 3-phase power and is not impacted by the status of the local at-motor disconnect switch.
Figure 6 - Control Circuit Wiring Diagram — Single External Power Supply
L1 L2 L3
Off
Switched Control Power
Unswitched Control Power
Disconnect
Motor
Controller
T1 T2 T3
A1 A2 A3
EtherNet
Comms
Inputs Outputs
ArmorStart
LT
Motor
Control
* Control power output is determined by disconnect status
L
N
24VDC
Class 2
External
24VDC Power
Supply
+
-
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
27
Chapter 1
Product Overview
Figure 7 - Control Circuit Wiring Diagram — Multiple External Power Supplies
ArmorStart
LT
L1 L2 L3
Off
Switched Control Power
Unswitched Control Power
Disconnect
Motor
Controller
T1 T2 T3
A1 A2 A3
EtherNet
Comms
Inputs Outputs
Motor
Control
* Control power output is determined by disconnect status
Class 2
External Switched
24VDC Power Supply
L
N
24VDC
+
-
Class 2
External Unswitched
24VDC Power Supply
L
N
24VDC
+
-
Figure 8 - Control Circuit Wiring Diagram — Internal Power Supply (optional)
Internal Power
Supply
Off
Disconnect
L1 L2 L3
Motor
Controller
T1 T2 T3
ArmorStart
LT
EtherNet
Comms
Inputs
Outputs
Motor
Control
* Control power output is determined by disconnect status
28
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Product Overview
Chapter 1
Motor Circuit
The ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controllers are rated to operate the following types of three-phase squirrel-cage induction motors:
Bulletin 290E/291E:
0.5 Hp (0.37 kW) to 5 Hp (3 kW) @ 480/277V AC
Bulletin 294E:
0.5 Hp (0.37 kW) to 2 Hp (1.5 kW) @ 480/277V AC
Local I/O
The ArmorStart LT provides as standard, 6 user configurable I/O points. By default, all points are configured as an Input. When not using the AOP, the user will need to refer to parameter 49 [IOPointConfiguration], to define an output point.
When using the AOP, the I/O point is configured from the General screen in the Module Definition section by clicking the “Change” button, see
This allows user to view and configure the I/O mix, refer to Figure 10
.
Figure 9 - Defining I/O Point
Figure 10 - Current I/O Point Configuration
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
29
Chapter 1
Product Overview
Mode of Operation
Bulletin 290E/291E
Overload Protection
The ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controller incorporates, as standard, electronic motor overload protection. This overload protection is accomplished electronically with an
I
2 t algorithm. The ArmorStart LT’s overload protection is programmable via the communication network, providing the user with greater flexibility.
The Bulletin 290E/291E includes programmable overload Class 10, 15, and 20 protection. The Bulletin 294E provides overload protection: 150% for 60s and
200% for 3s.
Refer to Chapter 6 , Specifications, for additional information.
Full-Voltage Start
This method is used in applications requiring across-the-line starting, in which full inrush current and locked-rotor torque are realized. The ArmorStart LT
Bulletin 290E offers full-voltage starting and Bulletin 291E offers full-voltage starting for reversing applications, from 0.5 Hp (0.37 kW) to 5 Hp (3 kW) at
480Y/277V AC, 3-phase power.
Figure 11 - Full-Voltage Start
100%
Percent
Voltage
Time (seconds)
30
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Mode of Operation
Bulletin 294E
Product Overview
Chapter 1
Sensorless Vector Performance
Using a distributed AC drive to operate mechanical equipment at optimum speed helps reduce energy costs and eliminates mechanical wear and tear that can occur in the mechanical parts. The advance monitoring found in ArmorStart LT protects critical equipment against unplanned downtime with advanced diagnostics and notification of irregular operating parameters. ArmorStart LT provides open-loop speed regulation (V/Hz) with slip compensation. This provides excellent speed regulation and high levels of torque across the entire speed range of the drive, and improved speed regulation as loading increases.
Open Loop Speed Regulation with Slip Compensation allows the VFD to automatically adjust the output frequency to compensate for speed changes due to motor loading. This feature utilizes an open loop, current feedback, slip compensation circuit. Slip Compensation works as an open loop speed regulator that increases the output frequency of the drive as the load is increased, or decreases the frequency as the load drops. This feature is used where the motor must run at a relatively constant speed regardless of torque output.
% of speed
100
99
98
97
96
95
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
% of load
With Slip
Compensation
Without Slip
Compensation
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
31
Chapter 1
Product Overview
Status LEDs and Reset
Figure 12 - Status, Diagnostic LEDs, and Reset
32
ArmorStart LT provides comprehensive status and diagnostics via 12 individually
marked LEDs shown in Figure 12
, located on the ECM module. In addition, a local reset is provide for clearing of faults.
details the diagnostic and status LEDs.
Table 5 - ArmorStart LT Status and Diagnostics Indicators
Indicator
PWR LED
MS – Module Status
LED
I/O Status
Enunciators 0…5
LEDs
Reset Button
Description
The bicolor (green/yellow) LED shows the state of the control voltage. When LED is off, switched and/or unswitched power is not present.
The bicolor (green/red) LED combines the functions of the Run and Fault LEDs.
The bicolor (green/yellow) LED shows the activity/link status of each EtherNet/IP port.
The bicolor (green/red) LED indicates the status of the module.
Flashing bicolor (red/green) indicates a self-test on power up.
Six yellow LEDs are numbered 0…5 and indicate the status of the input/output connectors. One LED for each I/O point.
The blue reset button will cause a protection fault reset to occur.
Color_1
Solid green is illuminated when switched and unswitched control power is within its specified limits and has the proper polarity.
Color_2
Solid yellow is illuminated when switched or unswitched control power is outside its specified limits or has incorrect polarity.
RUN/FLT LED
NS – Network Status
LED
The bicolor (green/red) LED indicates the status of the CIP network connection. See
Network Status Indicator for further information.
Flashing bicolor (red/green) indicates a self-test on power up.
LS1 and LS2 – Link
Status LEDs
Solid green is illuminated when a Run command is present.
Flashing green indicates an IP address is configured, no CIP connections are established, and an Exclusive Owner connection has not timed out.
Steady green indicates at least one CIP connection is established and an Exclusive
Owner connection has not timed out.
Solid green is illuminated when a link has been established at 100 Mbps.
The LED will blink red in a prescribed fault pattern when a protection fault (trip)
condition is present. See Table 6
for fault blink patterns.
Flashing red indicates the connection has timed out. Steady Red indicates a duplicate
IP Address detected.
Solid yellow is illuminated when a link has been established at 10 Mbps.
Flashing green indicates the device has not been configured.
Steady green indicates the device is configured and operational.
Yellow is illuminated when input is valid or output is on.
Off when input is not valid or the output is not turned on.
—
Flashing red indicates a resettable protection fault exists or the node address switches have been changed without a power cycle and do not match the in-use configuration.
Steady red indicates a non-resettable protection fault exists.
—
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Product Overview
Chapter 1
Electronic Data Sheet (EDS)
ArmorStart LT EtherNet/IP has an embedded electronic data sheet. An EDS consists of specially formatted text files, as defined by the CIP™. EDS files contain details about the readable and configurable parameters of the EtherNet/IP device. They also provide information about the I/O connections that the device supports and the content of the associated data structures. EDS are used by
EtherNet/IP device configuration tools, such as RSNetWorx™ for EtherNet/IP, and data servers such as RSLinx® Classic.
EDS files for all ArmorStart LT EtherNet/IP devices can be uploaded directly from the device via the web server interface. Rockwell Automation product EDS files are also available on the internet at: http://www.ab.com/networks/eds .
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
33
Chapter 1
Product Overview
Fault Diagnostics
Fault diagnostics capabilities built in the ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor
Controller are designed to help you pinpoint a problem for easy troubleshooting and quick re-starting.
Protection Faults
Protection faults will be generated when potentially dangerous or damaging conditions are detected. Protection faults are also known as “trips” or “faults”.
These faults will be reported in multiple formats, including:
•
Bit enumeration in the TripStatus parameter 16 in DeviceLogix
•
In the ArmorStart LT web server for ArmorStart EtherNet/IP version
•
As a sequence of LED flashes on the ECM
Table 6 - Protection Faults
7
8
5
6
LED Flash Bit Enumeration Bulletin 290E/291E Trip Status Bits Bulletin 294E Trip Status Bits
1 0 OverloadTrip
➊
OverloadTrip
➊
2 1
3
4
2
3
PhaseLossTrip
UnderPowerTrip
➊
SensorShortTrip
➊
PhaseLShortTrip
UnderPowerTrip
➊
SensorShortTrip
➊
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
PhaseImbalTrip
NonVolMemoryTrip reserved
JamTrip
StallTrip
UnderloadTrip reserved reserved reserved
OutputShortTrip
UserDefinedTrip
HardwareFltTrip
➊
➊
➊
OverCurrentTrip
NonVolMemoryTrip
➊
ParamSyncTrip
➊
DCBusOrDiscnnct
➊
StallTrip
➊
OverTemperature
➊
GroundFault
➊
RestartRetries
DriveHdwFault
➊
OutputShortTrip
➊
UserDefinedTrip
HardwareFltTrip
➊
➊
Cannot be disabled.
34
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Optional HOA Selector
Keypad
Product Overview
Chapter 1
Keypad Local Control
The HOA Selector Keypad allows for local start/stop/jog control in forward/ reverse motor direction. If two buttons are pressed simultaneously, this action is ignored by the device unless one of the buttons is the OFF button. If the OFF button is pressed at any time, the unit will go to the off state. When local Hand mode is entered, speed reference is switched to Internal Frequency. When in
“Auto” mode the unit the speed reference is switched to the mode specified in parameter 33 “SpeedReference”.
HAND
The Hand key will initiate starter operation
AUTO
The Auto key allows for Start/Stop control via the communications network
OFF
If the starter is running, pressing the OFF key will cause the starter to stop.
DIR Arrow
The Dir arrow selects the direction of the motor, either forward or reverse.
JOG
When pressed, JOG will be initiated if no other control devices are sending a stop command. Releasing the key will cause the drive to stop, using selected stop mode.
Optional HOA Keypad
Configuration
(Bulletin 290E/291E only)
The ArmorStart LT offers optional factory-installed Hand/OFF/Auto (HOA) configurations: Standard (Bulletin 290E) and Forward/Reverse (Bulletin 291E).
Figure 13 - Bulletin 290E Standard HOA
E
Figure 14 - Bulletin 291 Forward/Reverse HOA
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
35
Chapter 1
Product Overview
36
Bulletin 290E
With the KeypadMode parameter (parameter 66) set to 1 = Maintained, pressing the buttons reacts like a maintained switch.
Key Press
AUTO
HAND
OFF
FAULT PRESENT
OFF
Auto Mode — Motor Off
If no fault, Motor On
—
—
Current Mode
HAND
—
—
Motor turns Off
Motor turns Off
AUTO
—
—
Motor turns Off
Motor turns Off
With the KeypadMode parameter (parameter 66) set to 0 = Momentary, pressing the buttons reacts like a momentary switch.
Key Press
NO KEY PRESSED
AUTO
HAND
OFF
PROTECTION FAULT PRESENT
OFF Key
—
Auto Mode — Motor Off
If no fault, Motor On
—
—
Current Mode
HAND
Motor Off
—
—
Motor Off
Motor Off
AUTO Key
—
—
—
Motor Off
—
Bulletin 291E
With the KeypadMode parameter (parameter 66) set to 1 = Maintained, pressing the buttons reacts like a maintained switch.
FWD/REV
Key Press
AUTO
HAND
OFF
PROTECTION FAULT PRESENT
OFF
FWD LED Set REV LED
REV LED Set FWD LED
Auto Mode — Motor Off
If no fault, Motor On
Ignore
Ignore
Current Mode
HAND
—
—
—
Motor Off
Motor Off
AUTO
—
—
—
Motor Off
—
With the KeypadMode parameter (parameter 66) set to 0 = Momentary, pressing the buttons reacts like a momentary switch.
Key Press
NO KEY PRESSED
FWD/REV
AUTO
HAND
OFF
PROTECTION FAULT PRESENT
OFF
—
FWD LED Set REV LED
REV LED Set FWD LED
Auto Mode — Motor Off
If no fault, Motor On
—
—
Current Mode
HAND
Motor Off
—
—
—
Motor Off
Motor Off
AUTO
—
—
—
—
Motor Off
—
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Product Overview
Chapter 1
Optional HOA Selector
Keypad with Jog Function
(Bulletin 294E only)
The HOA Selector Keypad with Jog function allows for local start/stop control with capabilities to jog in forward/reverse motor directions.
Figure 15 - Bulletin 294E Jog/Forward/Reverse HOA
Keypad Local Control
With the KeypadMode parameter (parameter 66) set to 1 = Maintained, pressing the buttons reacts like a maintained switch.
Key Press
NO KEY PRESSED
FWD/REV
JOG
AUTO
HAND
OFF
PROTECTION FAULT PRESENT
OFF
—
FWD LED Set REV LED
REV LED Set FWD LED
If no fault, Jog Motor
Auto Mode — Motor Off
If no fault, Motor On
—
—
Current Mode
HAND
—
FWD LED Set REV LED
REV LED Set FWD LED
—
—
—
Motor Off
Motor Off
JOG
Motor Off
—
—
—
—
Motor Off
Motor Off
AUTO
—
—
—
—
—
Motor Off
—
With the KeypadMode parameter (parameter 66) set to 0 = Momentary, pressing the buttons reacts like a momentary switch.
Key Press
NO KEY PRESSED
FWD/REV
JOG
AUTO
HAND
OFF
PROTECTION FAULT PRESENT
OFF
—
FWD LED Set REV LED
REV LED Set FWD LED
If no fault, Jog Motor
Auto Mode — Motor Off
If no fault, Motor On
—
—
Current Mode
HAND
Motor Off
FWD LED Set REV LED
REV LED Set FWD LED
—
—
—
Motor Off
Motor Off
JOG
Motor Off
—
—
—
—
Motor Off
Motor Off
AUTO
—
—
—
—
—
Motor Off
—
IMPORTANT
If multiple buttons are pressed at the same time, the software interprets this as a “no button pressed” condition. The only exception to this rule is if multiple buttons are pressed and one of them is the OFF button. If the OFF button is pressed in combination with any combination of other buttons, the processor will behave as if the OFF button were pressed by itself.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
37
Chapter 1
Product Overview
Source Brake Contactor and Connector
(Bulletin 294E only)
Keypad Disable Parameter
“Keypad Disable”, parameter 67, only inhibits the “HAND”, “FWD”, “REV” and
“JOG” buttons on the HOA keypad. The “OFF” and “AUTO” buttons are always enabled, even if parameter 67 is set to “1=Disable”. The keypad OFF button can not be disabled.
An internal contactor is used to switch the electromechanical motor brake
On/Off. The motor brake contactor is actuated via the internal power which supplies L1 and L2 voltage to the mechanical brake in the motor. The source brake can be configured for independent control via parameter configuration.
The internal contactor, electromechanical motor brake, and associated motor branch cable are protected by the branch circuit protective device. There is no resettable or replaceable protective device in ArmorStart LT.
WARNING:
If the branch circuit protective device trips, the user must ensure that the Source Brake function is still operational prior to putting the equipment back in service. If the source brake function is not working properly, loss of brake function or motor damage can occur.
38
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Receiving
Unpacking
Inspecting
Storing
Chapter
2
Installation and Wiring
It is the responsibility of the user to thoroughly inspect the equipment before accepting the shipment from the freight company. Check the item(s) received against the purchase order. If any items are damaged, it is the responsibility of the user not to accept delivery until the freight agent has noted the damage on the freight bill. Should any concealed damage be found during unpacking, it is also the responsibility of the user to notify the freight agent. The shipping container must be left intact and the freight agent should be requested to make a visual inspection of the equipment.
Remove all packing material, wedges, or braces from within and around the
ArmorStart LT distributed motor controller and other device(s). Check the contents of the package to see if all contents are included. Contact your local
Allen-Bradley representative if any items are missing.
IMPORTANT
Before the installation and start-up of the drive, a general inspection of mechanical integrity (i.e. loose parts, wires, connections, packing materials, etc.) must be made.
After unpacking, check nameplate catalog number(s) of the item(s) against the purchase order. See
for an explanation of the catalog numbering system which will aid in nameplate interpretation.
The controller should remain in the shipping container prior to installation.
If the equipment is not to be used for a period of time, it must be stored according to the following instructions in order to maintain warranty coverage.
•
Store in a clean, dry location.
•
Store within an ambient temperature range of –25…+85°C
(–13…+185°F).
•
Store within a relative humidity range of 0…95%, noncondensing.
•
Do not store equipment where it could be exposed to a corrosive atmosphere.
•
Do not store equipment in a construction area.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
39
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
Installation Precautions
The following statements must be read and understood.
ATTENTION:
The earth ground terminal shall be connected to a solid earth ground via a low-impedance connection.
ATTENTION:
Copper ground conductors are recommended. The ArmorStart LT external protective earth (PE) pad is aluminum. Refer to your local electrical installation standard for proper bonding and protection when dissimilar metals are used.
ATTENTION:
An incorrectly applied or installed controller can damage components or reduce product life. Wiring or application errors, such as undersizing the motor, incorrect or inadequate AC supply, or out of range ambient temperatures, may result in malfunction of the system.
Precautions for
Bulletin 290E/291E
Applications
Precautions for
Bulletin 294E Applications
Dimensions
SHOCK HAZARD:
To prevent electrical shock, open appropriate machine disconnect switch prior to connecting and disconnecting cables. Risk of shock — environment rating may not be maintained with open receptacles.
SHOCK HAZARD:
The drive contains high voltage capacitors which take time to discharge after removal of mains supply. Before working on drive, ensure isolation of mains supply from line inputs (L1, L2, L3). Wait three minutes for capacitors to discharge to safe voltage levels. Failure to do so may result in personal injury or death.
ArmorStart LT consists of three components that are non-replaceable. The
Electronic Control Module (ECM); a gland plate for wire entry; and the aluminum alloy enclosure which makes up the back cover, top housing, and wiring access door. The ECM includes communications, discrete I/O, status and diagnostic LEDs, and the node address switches. All mating surfaces are sealed using foam in place gasket or o-ring.
40
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Dimensions
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. All dimensions are subject to change.
130
(5.1)
Figure 16 - Dimensions for Bulletin 290E/291E
260
(10.2)
166,5
(6.6)
202,05
(8.0)
170
(6.7)
217,83
(8.6)
65
(2.6)
Front View
152,65
(6.0)
Right Side View
37
(1.5)
57,13
(2.3)
38.49
(1.5)
24,25
(1.0)
48,5
(1.9)
1 in. conduit opening
0.75 in. conduit opening
Conduit Gland Entrance
Line
Motor
37
(1.5)
57,13
(2.3)
38,61
(1.5)
24,25
(1.0)
ArmorConnect Internal Power
Supply Gland Plate (optional)
Line
37
(1.5)
57,13
(2.3)
Control
Motor
38,49
(1.5)
24,25
(1.0)
48,5
(1.9)
ArmorConnect Media
Gland Entrance (optional)
Line
Motor
37
(1.5)
Control
Source Brake
57,13
(2.3)
38,49
(1.5)
48,5
(1.9)
ArmorConnect Source Brake
Gland Plate (optional)
IMPORTANT
For proper heat dissipation and product operation, mount the ArmorStart LT in the vertical orientation as shown.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
41
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
Figure 17 - Dimensions for Bulletin 294E
240
(9.4)
381
(15.0)
206,43
(8.1)
170
(6.7)
219,32
(8.6)
120
(4.7)
Front View
202,27
(8.0)
37
(1.5)
92,9
(3.7)
38.49
(1.5)
24,25
48,5
(1.9)
1 in. conduit opening
0.75 in. conduit opening
Conduit Gland Entrance - Bottom View
Right Side View
Line
Motor
37
(1.5)
Line
37
(1.5)
Control
Line
Motor
Motor
37
(1.5)
Control
Source Brake
92.9
(3.7)
92,9
(3.7)
92,9
(3.7)
38,61
(1.5)
24,25
(1.0)
ArmorConnect Internal Power
Supply Gland Plate (optional)
38,55
(1.5) 24,25
(1.0)
48,5
(1.9)
ArmorConnect Media Gland
Entrance (optional)
38,55
(1.5)
48,5
(1.9)
ArmorConnect Gland Entrance
with Source Brake (optional)
42
IMPORTANT
For proper heat dissipation and product operation, mount the ArmorStart LT in the vertical orientation as shown.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
Dimensions are shown in millimeters (inches). Dimensions are not intended to be used for manufacturing purposes. All dimensions are subject to change.
Figure 18 - ArmorStart LT Gland Plate Matrix
G1 Conduit
Standard
U.S. Trade Knock-outs
G2 Media
Dia. 25.5 mm
Dia. 20.5 mm
G3 Conduit
Daisy Chaining
IP66 Metric Fittings
Cat. No.
290-G3-A2
No Internal Power Supply
No Source Brake
1.00 in.
(25.4 mm)
0.75 in.
(19.05 mm)
Source Brake
No Internal Power Supply
0.75 in.
(19.05 mm)
Dia. 25.5 mm
Dia. 20.5 mm
290-G3-A3
Internal Power Supply
No Source Brake
1.00 in.
(25.4 mm)
0.75 in.
(19.05 mm)
Dia. 25.5 mm
Dia. 20.5 mm
290-G3-A4
Internal Power Supply and Source Brake
Dia. 25.5 mm
Dia. 20.5 mm
1.00 in.
(25.4 mm)
0.75 in.
(19.05 mm)
290-G3-A5
45°
User Modified
Gland Plate Clearances
Modifications are not permitted in the keepout region. Fitting(s) should be oriented so that they do not interfere with the enclosure when the gland plate is installed.
Torque the gland mounting screws to 12…14 in•lb (1.3…1.6 N•m).
66.1 mm
10.1 mm
290-G3-A1
80.7 mm
91.3 mm
11.8 mm
Connection Locations
Figure 19 - Internal Power, Control, and Ground Locations
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
43
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
Figure 20 - Gland Connection
Wiring Terminal Detail
The power, control, and ground wire capacity and the tightening torque
requirements are shown in Table 8 . The maximum number of connections
per terminal are shown in
. As shown in
Figure 21 all the terminals are
found in the wiring area. Access can be gained by removing the terminal access cover plate.
44
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Wire Strip Length
0.35 ± 0.01 in.
(9 ± 0.2 mm)
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
L1
L2
T1
T2
L3
T3
Figure 21 - ArmorStart LT Power and Control Terminals
A1
A2
A3
PE
B1 B2
Table 7 - Power, Control, and Ground Terminal Designations
Terminal Designations
A1
A2
A3
L2
L3
PE
L1
T1
T2
T3
B1
B2
Wires/Connections
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
Description
Switched 24V DC Control Power (+)
➊
Control Power Common (–)
➊
Unswitched 24V DC Control Power (+)
➊
Ground
Line Power – Phase A
Line Power – Phase B
Line Power – Phase C
Motor Connection – Phase A
Motor Connection – Phase B
Motor Connection – Phase C
Source Brake Connection – B1
➋
Source Brake Connection – B2
➋
➊
When internal power supply option is selected, no connection is made here.
➋
Available only with Bulletin 294E.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
45
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
Power Terminals
Motor Terminals
Control Terminals
PE/Ground
Source Brake (Bulletin 294)
Table 8 - Power, Control, and Ground Wire Capacity and the Tightening Torque Requirements
Wire Size (2) #18…#10 AWG (0.8…5.2 mm
2
) per terminal
Tightening Torque
Wire Size
Tightening Torque
Wire Size
Tightening Torque
Wire Size
Tightening Torque
Wire Size
Tightening Torque
10.6 +/– 2 lb•in (1.2 +/– 0.2 N•m)
#18…#10 AWG (0.8…5.2 mm
2
) per terminal
10.6 +/– 2 lb•in (1.2 +/– 0.2 N•m)
(2) #18…#10 AWG (0.8…5.2 mm
2
) per terminal
10.6 +/– 2 lb•in (1.2 +/– 0.2 N•m)
(2) #16…#10 AWG (1.3…5.2 mm
2
) per terminal
18 +/– 2 lb•in (2 +/– 0.2 N•m)
#16 …#10 AWG (1.0…4.0 mm
2
) per terminal
4.8 ± 2 lb•in (0.5 ± 0.2 N•m )
IMPORTANT
ArmorStart LT is UL Listed for use with 14 AWG wire or preassemble power cable. Refer to your local electrical code(s) when applying 16 AWG wire or cable in a motor circuit.
Branch Circuit Protection
ATTENTION:
Select the motor branch circuit protection that complies with the
NFPA79/ or NFPA70 (NEC) and any other governing regional or local codes.
The ArmorStart LT is Underwriters Laboratory (UL) Group Motor listed. Refer to the product Specifications , Chapter 6 for maximum branch fuse and circuit breaker ratings. Select the motor branch circuit protection device that complies with NFPA70 (NEC) or NFPA79, and any other governing regional or local codes. The installer shall observe the product nameplate markings and not apply the ArmorStart LT where the maximum perspective short circuit current is exceeded. The ArmorStart LT shall be applied to a solidly grounded WYE power distribution system that does not exceed 480V AC, 60 Hz or 400V AC, 50 Hz.
WARNING:
Do not install the ArmorStart LT where the maximum available fault current exceeds the product rating.
46
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Typical System Example
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
The primary function of ArmorStart LT is to control and protect a three-phase squirrel cage induction motor. Three-phase power enters through terminals that are connected to a manually operated disconnect switch. The three-phase power may also connect internally to an optional three-phase to 24V DC power supply
(IPS). Wired in series with the disconnect is an electrically operated contactor or a variable frequency drive. For Bulletin 294E an optional source brake contactor may also be connected to the disconnect output terminals. The source brake contactor is used to control an electromechanical brake physically attached to the motor. The microcontroller and interface circuits are contained in the ECM.
The ECM also houses 6 user configurable I/O points. These six I/O points are used for system level control and are accessible via by the communication network or DeviceLogix.
The user has the flexibility to coordinate the appropriate safety function for their application. ArmorStart LT does not provide a safe torque-off input. Therefore, the safety function is configured externally from the controller and based upon the risk assessment.
For example, the risk assessment may require a safety circuit with a high level of performance. In this example, a safety relay with redundant safety contactors and emergency stop function can be integrated into the machine controls.
Figure 22 below is an example of this configuration. Contact your local
Rockwell Automation supplier for additional support regarding the safety circuit or for a risk assessment of your machinery.
Figure 22 -
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
47
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
ArmorConnect Media
For greater flexibility and faster installations the user may also use
ArmorConnect media for a complete plug-n-play solution. This solution
provides plug-in style stop stations, as shown in Figure 23
. The ArmorConnect power media offers both three-phase and control power cable cord set systems.
These include patchcords, receptacles, tees, reducers and accessories to be utilized with the ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controller. This cable system allows quick connections and reduced installation time by utilizing pre-manufactured cable assemblies for more reliable connection of the three phase and control power.
IMPORTANT
When specifying power media for use with the ArmorStart LT Distributed
Motor Controllers (Bulletin 290E/291E and Bulletin 294E) use only
ArmorConnect power media. The use of any other power media will void the UL Listing of the motor controller.
IMPORTANT
Refer to your local electrical code for proper application and protection of long length power cable to minimize physical damage and appropriate short-circuit and ground-fault protection for the assembly.
Figure 23 -
Ar m orConnect Configuration Exa m ple
48
IMPORTANT
A single channel Stop is pictured. It is necessary to perform a risk assessment and determine specific application requirements.
1. CAT5e Bulkhead Connector and Receptacle (Example Cat. No.:1585A-DD4JD)
2. CAT5e Patch Cord, IP67, M12 D-Code, Male Straight, Male Right Angle (Example Cat. No.: 1585D-M4TBDE-*)
3. CAT5e, Patch Cable, IP20, RJ45 Male to RJ45 Male (Example Cat. No. 1585J-M4TB-*)
4. Control Power Media Patchcords – PatchCord cable with integral female or male connector on each end (Example Cat. No.: 889N-F65GFNM-*)
5. Control Power Tees – The E-stop In Tee (Cat. No.: 898N-653ST-NKF) is used to connect to the Bulletin 800F On-Machine Stop station using a control power media patchcord.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
6. The E-stop Out tee (Cat. No.: 898N-653ES-NKF) is used with cordset or patchcord to connect to the ArmorStart Distributed Motor Controller.
7. Control Power Receptacles – Female receptacles are a panel mount connector with flying leads (Cat. No.: 888N-D65AF1-*)
8. Three-Phase Power Trunk – Patchcord cable with integral female or male connector on each end (Example Cat. No.:280-PWRM35A-M*)
9. Three-Phase Drop Cable – PatchCord cable with integral female or male connector on each end (Example Cat. No.:280-PWRM22A-M*)
10. Three-Phase Power Tees and Reducer – Tee connects to a single drop line to trunk with quick change connectors (Cat. No.: 280-T35)
Reducing Tee connects to a single drop line (Mini) to trunk (Quick change) connector (Cat. No.: 280-RT35)
Reducer connects from quick change male connector to mini female connector (Cat. No.: 280-RA35)
11. Three-Phase Power Receptacles – Female receptacles are a panel mount connector with flying leads (Cat. No.: 280-M35F-M1)
IMPORTANT
See the On-Machine Connectivity catalog for specific Ethernet media components
Figure 24 - On-Machine Stop Stations
Enclosure
Type
Plastic
Metal
Quick Connect
Mini Receptacle
Knockout
Type
Metric
Operator
Twist to Release
Illumination
Voltage
24V AC/DC
24V AC/DC
Contact
Configuration
1 N.C./1 N.O.
Cat. No.
800F-1YMQ4
800F-1MYMQ4
ArmorConnect Cable Ratings
The ArmorConnect Power Media cables are rated per UL Type TC 600V 90°C
Dry 75°C Wet, Exposed Run (ER) or MTW 600V 90°C or STOOW 105°C
600V - Canadian Standards Association (CSA) STOOW 600V FT2.
For additional information regarding ArmorConnect Power Media refer to ArmorStart LT selection guide, publication 290-SG001_-EN-P.
Branch Circuit Protection Requirements for ArmorConnect
Three-Phase Power Media
When using ArmorConnect Three-Phase Power Media, fuses or circuit breakers may be used for the motor branch circuit ground fault protection if properly sized and allowed by product labeling.
Circuit Breaker:
Where ArmorStart LT is used with ArmorConnect — suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 10000 RMS Symmetrical Amperes
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
49
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
Electrical Wiring
at 480Y/277 VAC maximum when protected by Cat. No.140U-D6D3-C30 circuit breaker, refer to the Specifications , Chapter 6 .
WARNING:
The total circuit impedance including each cable assembly's own impedance, must be low enough to ensure any short-circuit or ground fault current that can flow through any assembly, will be large enough to operate the magnetic trip of the Cat. No. 140U-D63-C* circuit breaker. Refer to NFPA 70 and
NFPA 79 or your local electrical code for guidance in coordinating over current protective devices and the circuit being protected.
Fusing:
Where ArmorStart LT is used with ArmorConnect — suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 10000 RMS Symmetrical Amperes
(SCCR) at 480/277 V AC maximum when protected by 40 A CC, J, and T class fuses, refer to the Specifications , Chapter 6 .
ArmorStart LT EtherNet/IP utilizes 24V DC control power for communications and I/O. The control power terminal connections are labeled A1, A2, and A3.
Switched power (A1) will supply outputs and motor control. Unswitched power (A3) will supply logic power, communications, and sensor inputs.
IMPORTANT
EtherNet/IP is an unpowered network, therefore if device status is important, the A3 terminal must have an unswitched power source.
50
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
PE
Switched
(SW)
Common
A1
A2
A3
Switched
(USW)
L1
L2
L3
At Motor
Disconnect
Figure 25 - Bulletin 290E Full Voltage
Overload
DOL
Disconnect Status
Fwd Status
Fwd Control
Micro
L1
L2
L3
Sinking
Input or
Sensor Voltage
1 2
4
5
3
Common
6-User Configurable I/O Points
Figure 26 - Bulletin 291E Full Voltage Reversing
Overload
Reverser
Disconnect Status
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
T1
T2
T3
Motor
T1
T2
T3
Motor
Micro
PE
Common)
Switched
(USW)
A1
A2
A3
Sensor Voltage
Input or output
1 2
4
5
3
Common
6-User Configurable I/O Points
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
51
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
L1
L2
L3
At Motor
Disconnect
Figure 27 - Bulletin 294E VFD
Drive
Enable
L1
L2
TB2
L3
1
11
Disconnect Status
T1
T2
T3
J3
Micro
Fan
PE
Common)
A1
A2
A3
L1
L2
L3
T1
T2
T3
Motor
At Motor
Disconnect
Sensor Voltage
1 2
4
5
3
Common
6-User Configurable I/O pOINTS
Figure 28 - Bulletin 294E VFD with -SB
L1
L2
TB2
L3
1
11
T1
T2
T3
J3
Disconnect Status
Brake
Brake Status
Control
T1
T2
T3
Motor
B1
B2
#16 AWG Minimum
40A BCPD max
Micro
Fan
PE
Switched
(SW)
Common
Switched
(USW)
A1
A2
A3
52
Sensor Voltage
1 2
4
5
3
Common
6-User Configurable I/O Points
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
L1
L2
L3
PE
1
PE
L1
L2
L3
Figure 29 - Bulletin 290E Full Voltage with -IPS
Overload
DOL
Disconnect Status
Fwd Status
Fwd Control
Micro
2
1
3
4
Sensor Voltage
1 2
4
5
3
Common
6-User Configurable I/O Points
Figure 30 - Bulletin 291E Full Voltage Reversing with -IPS
Overload
Reverser
Disconnect Status
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
T1
T2
T3
Motor
T1
T2
T3
Motor
Micro
4
3
2
1
Sensor Voltage
1 2
4
5
3
Common
6-User Configurable I/O Points
Figure 31 - Bulletin 294E VFD with -IPS
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
53
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
At Motor
Disconnect
L1
L2
L3
PE
L1
L2
L3
PE
L1
L2
TB2
L3
1
11
T1
T2
T3
J3
T1
T2
T3
Motor
Disconnect Status
Micro
Fan
At Motor
Disconnect
2
1
3
4
Input or output
Sensor Voltage
1 2
4
5
3
Common
6-User Configurable I/O Points
Figure 32 - Bulletin 294E VFD with -IPS, -SB
Disconnect Status
L1
L2
TB2
L3
1
11
T1
T2
T3
J3
Brake
Brake Status
Control
T1
T2
T3
Motor
B1
B2
#16 AWG Minimum
40A BCPD max
Micro
Fan
2
1
3
4
Input or output
Sensor Voltage
1
4
5
2
3
Common
54
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
Group Motor Installations for
USA and Canada Markets
When ArmorStart LT is applied according to group motor installation requirements, two or more motors of any rating or controller type, are permitted on a single branch circuit. Group Motor Installation has been successfully used for many years in the USA and Canada.
IMPORTANT
For additional information regarding group motor installations with the
ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor Controller, see Appendix A
Wiring Cable Workmanship Guidelines
In addition to conduit and seal-tite raceway, it is acceptable to utilize cable that is dual rated Tray Cable Exposed Runs (TC-ER) and Cord, STOOW, for power and control wiring on ArmorStart LT installations. In the USA and Canada installations, the following guidance is outlined by the National Electrical Code
(NEC) and National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 79.
In industrial establishments where the conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only qualified persons service the installation, and where the exposed cable is continuously supported and protected against physical damage using mechanical protection, such as struts, angles, or channels, Type TC tray cable that complies with the crush and impact requirements of Type MC
(Metal Clad) cable and is identified for such use with the marking Type TC-ER
(Exposed Run)
➊
shall be permitted between a cable tray and the utilization equipment or device as open wiring. The cable shall be secured at intervals not exceeding 6 ft (1.8 m) and installed in a “good workman-like” manner.
Equipment grounding for the utilization equipment shall be provided by an equipment grounding conductor within the cable.
While the ArmorStart LT is intended for installation in factory floor environments of industrial establishments, the following must be taken into consideration when locating the ArmorStart LT in the application:
•
Cables, including those for control voltage including 24V DC and communications, are not to be exposed to an operator or building traffic on a continuous basis.
•
Location of the ArmorStart LT to minimize exposure to continual traffic is recommended. If location to minimize traffic flow is unavoidable, other barriers to minimize inadvertent exposure to the cabling should be considered.
•
Routing cables should be done in such a manner to minimize inadvertent exposure and/or damage.
•
If conduit or other raceways are not used, it is recommended that strain relief fittings be utilized when installing the cables for the control and power wiring through the conduit openings.
➊
Historically cable meeting these crush and impact requirements was designated and marked “Open Wiring.” Cable so marked is equivalent to the present Type TC-ER and can be used.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
55
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
General Wiring
Considerations
56
Service Space
The working space around the ArmorStart LT can be minimized as the
ArmorStart LT does not require examination, adjustment, servicing or maintenance while energized. In lieu of this service, the ArmorStart LT is meant to be unplugged and replaced after proper lock-out/tag-out procedures have been employed.
Hand Operation (HOA) Considerations
The Hand/Off/Auto (HOA) is a factory-installed option that the user may select. The HOA keypad may require the ArmorStart LT to be installed as follows, if the application requires frequent use of the hand operated interface by the equipment operator:
1.
Install not less than 2 ft (0.6 m) above the servicing level and within easy reach of the operator, who is in a normal working position.
2.
Install where the operator is not placed in a hazardous situation when operating the equipment.
3.
Install where the possibility of inadvertent operation is minimized.
Where inadvertent operation may cause adverse effects the HOA can be disabled via parameter 67.
Wire in an industrial control application can be divided into three groups: power, control, and signal. The following recommendations for physical separation between these groups is provided to reduce the coupling effect:
•
Minimum spacing between different wire groups in the same tray should be 6 in. (16 cm).
•
Wire runs outside an enclosure should be run in conduit or have shielding/ armor with equivalent attenuation.
•
Different wire groups should be run in separate conduits.
•
Minimum spacing between conduits containing different wire groups should be 3 in. (8 cm).
•
Minimum spacing between 3-phase power cabling and Ethernet or I/O cabling should be at least 6 in. (16 cm) to avoid noise issues, unless properly shielded.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Grounding
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
An effectively grounded product is one that is “intentionally connected to earth through a ground connection or connections of sufficiently low impedance and having sufficient current-carrying capacity to prevent the buildup of voltages which may result in undue hazard to connected equipment or to persons” (as defined by the US National Electric Code NFPA70, Article 100B). Grounding is done for two basic reasons: safety (defined above) and noise containment or reduction. While the safety ground scheme and the noise current return circuit may sometimes share the same path and components, they should be considered different circuits with different requirements.
Grounding Safety Grounds
The object of safety grounding is to ensure that all metalwork is at the same ground (or Earth) potential at power frequencies. Impedance between the drive and the building scheme ground must conform to the requirements of national and local industrial safety regulations or electrical codes. These will vary based on country, type of distribution system and other factors. Periodically check the integrity of all ground connections.
General safety dictates that all metal parts are connected to earth with separate copper wire or wires of the appropriate gauge. Most equipment has specific provisions to connect a safety ground or PE (protective earth) directly to it.
Grounding PE or Ground
The safety ground - PE must be connected to earth ground. This point must be connected to an adjacent building steel (girder, joist), a floor ground rod, a bus bar or a building ground grid. Grounding points must comply with national and local industrial safety regulations or electrical codes. Some codes may require redundant ground paths and periodic examination of connection integrity.
IMPORTANT
To avoid electrolytic corrosion on the external earth terminal, avoid spraying moisture directly on the terminal. When used in washdown environments apply a sealant or other corrosion inhibitor on the external ground terminal to minimize any negative effects of galvanic or electro-chemical corrosion.x
Ground connections should be inspected on a regular basis.
Grounding Motors
The motor frame or stator core must be connected directly to the PE connection with a separate ground conductor. It is recommended that each motor frame be grounded to building steel at the motor.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
57
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
Power Distribution
The type of transformer and the connection configuration feeding an
ArmorStart LT Bulletin 294E plays an important role in its performance and safety.
Delta/Wye with Grounded Wye Neutral
Figure 33 -
AC Line Voltage
Line Reactor
58
Delta/Wye with Grounded Wye Neutral is the most common type of distribution system. The grounded neutral provides a direct path for common mode current caused by the drive output.
SHOCK HAZARD:
ArmorStart LT requires the use of grounded Wye power systems.
Incoming voltage imbalances greater than 2% can cause large unequal currents in a drive. An input line reactor may be necessary when line voltage imbalances are greater than 2%.
In general, ArmorStart LT does not require line reactors. In most applications, the ArmorStart LT is further away from the power distribution panel, therefore the length of cable provides additional impedance as compared to an in-panel solution.
Therefore, ArmorStart LT does not define a minimum line impedance specification, and does not require a line reactor. Its design trades the external reactor supplied by the customer for an internal fan integral to the controller.
This improves the overall life of the product. To achieve maximum electrical life of Bulletin 294, a minimum 800 uH line reactor for the group can be applied to extend total service life.
In addition, if line disturbance mitigation is also necessary, the ArmorStart LT is equipped with an EMI filter and when used with a shielded motor cable reduces the impact of the power switching components. For CE compliant installations
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
refer to the recommended EMI/RFI cord grip accessory or quick disconnect shielded motor cable. Contact your local sales representative for details.
If however, the customer specifications require input line reactors or transformers, the recommendation is to group the ArmorStarts at the distribution panel under one line reactor (not individual reactors or transformers). Keep in mind where full voltage ArmorStarts are included with VFD ArmorStarts, the starting currents of the full voltage ArmorStarts can be significant. The current must be accounted for in the selection of the line reactor or you run the risk of nuisance undervoltage faults of the VFD ArmorStarts while the full voltage ArmorStarts are starting their motors.
ATTENTION:
For 50°C ambients ArmorStart LT must be derated and applied with a minimum of 800 uH to1200 uH line reactor. Failure to follow this application requirement will result in premature product failure. Contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for assistance.
Bulletin 294 Motor Cable
Considerations
The majority of recommendations regarding drive cable address issues are caused by the nature of the drive output. A PWM drive creates AC motor current by sending DC voltage pulses to the motor in a specific pattern. These pulses affect the wire insulation and can be a source of electrical noise. The rise time, amplitude, and frequency of these pulses must be considered when choosing a wire/cable type. The choice of cable must consider:
1.
The effects of the drive output once the cable is installed
2.
The need for the cable to contain noise caused by the drive output
3.
The amount of cable charging current available from the drive
4.
Possible voltage drop (and subsequent loss of torque) for long wire runs
Keep the motor cable lengths less than 45 ft from the ArmorStart LT.
Unshielded Cable
Properly designed multi-conductor cable can provide superior performance in wet applications, significantly reduce voltage stress on wire insulation and reduce cross coupling between drives.
The use of cables without shielding is generally acceptable for installations where electrical noise created by the drive does not interfere with the operation of other devices such as: communications cards, photoelectric switches, weigh scales, and others. Be certain the installation does not require shielded cable to meet specific EMC standards for CE, C-Tick or FCC. Cable specifications depend on the installation type.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
59
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
Figure 34 - Unshielded Multi-Conductor Cable
Filler PVC Outer
Sheath
W
B
R
G
Single Ground
Conductor
Shielded Cable
Shielded cable contains all of the general benefits of multi-conductor cable with the added benefit of a copper braided shield that can contain much of the noise generated by a typical AC Drive. Strong consideration for shielded cable should be given for installations with sensitive equipment such as weigh scales, capacitive proximity switches, and other devices that may be affected by electrical noise in the distribution system. Applications with large numbers of drives in a similar location, imposed EMC regulations, or a high degree of communications/networking are also good candidates for shielded cable.
An acceptable shielded cable will have 4 XLPE insulated conductors with a
100% coverage foil and an 85% coverage copper braided shield (with drain wire) surrounded by a PVC jacket.
Figure 35 - Shielded Cable with Four Conductors
Shield
Drain Wire
W
R
G
B
Recommended Cable Connectors/Glands
Choose cable connectors or glands that offer the best cable protection, shield termination, and ground contact.
60
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
Recommended Cord Grips
The following are recommended cord grips to be used for ArmorStart LT installations.
Table 9 - Cord grip for Motor, Power, and Control
Recommended Thomas and Betts Cord Grips for G1 and G3 Glands.
Motor/Source Brake
Motor/Source Brake
Power
Description
Power
Control Power, Motor/Source
Brake
G3
3-Phase Power G3
➊
Contact Thomas and Betts for product selection details
Gland
G1
G1
G1
G1
Knockout
Size
0.75 in.
0.75 in.
1.0 in.
1.0 in.
M20
M25
Cable Diameter Range (in.
2
)
0.500…0.750
0.660…0.780
0.660…0.780
0.770…0.895
0.236…0.473
0.512…0.709
Thomas and Betts Part Nos.
Cord Grip
Sealing
Ring
Lock Nut
2932NM
2675
2676
2677
5263
5263
5264
5264
142TB
142TB
143
143
CC-ISO20-G
CC-ISO25-G
➊
➊
GMN-M20
GMN-M25
Shield Terminating Connectors
The cable connector selected must provide good 360 o
contact and low transfer impedance from the shield or armor of the cable to the conduit entry plate at both the motor and the ArmorStart LT for electrical bonding. SKINTOP
®
MS-SC/MS-SCL cable grounding connectors and NPT/PG adapters from
LAPPUSA are good examples of this type of shield terminating gland.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
61
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
U (T1)
V (T2)
W (T3)
PE
One or More
Ground Leads
Figure 36 - Terminating the Shield with a Connector
Metal connector body makes direct contact with the braid wires
Braid wires pulled back in a 360
°
pattern around the ground cone of the connector
Ground Bushing
Metal locknut bonds the connector to the panel
Drain wires pulled back in a 360 ° pattern around the ground cone of the connector
Electromagnetic
Compatibility (EMC)
ATTENTION:
Shielded connector or motor cable is mandatory for CE compliant installations.
The following guidelines are provided for EMC installation compliance.
General Notes (Bulletin 294E only)
•
The motor cable should be kept as short as possible in order to avoid electromagnetic emissions as well as capacitive currents. CE conformity of ArmorStart LT with EMC directive does not guarantee the entire machine installation complies with CE EMC requirements. Many factors can influence total machine/installation compliance.
•
The EMI filter may result in relatively high ground leakage currents.
Therefore, ArmorStart LT must only be applied in installations that are solidly grounded (bonded) to the building power distribution ground.
62
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
ATTENTION: RFI Filter Grounding.
Due to the presence of an integral EMI filter, this product may draw more that 3.5 mA of leakage current. The controller must only be used in installations with grounded AC supply systems and be permanently installed and solidly grounded (bonded) to the building power distribution ground. Grounding should not include any form of plug or socket that would permit inadvertent disconnection. Consult your local codes regarding redundant ground connections and/or size of protective earthing conductor. The integrity of all connections should be periodically checked.
Ethernet, DeviceNet, and
I/O Connections
DeviceNet Connector (M18)
Pin 1 – Drain (no connection)
Pin 2 – +VDNET
Pin 3 – -VDNET
Pin 4 – CAN_H
Pin 5– CAN_L
Ethernet/IP Connector D-coded (M12)
4
3
M12 Female Ethernet Connector
Pin 1 – Tx+
Pin 2 – Rx+
Pin 3 – Tx–
Pin 4 – Rx–
I/O Connector (M12)
Pin 1 – Sensor Source Voltage
Pin 2 – Not Used
Pin 3 – Common
Pin 4 – Input or Output
Pin 5 – Not Used
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
63
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
ArmorConnect Power
Media Receptacles
ArmorStart LT utilizes a M22 male receptacle for power inputs and a M22 female receptacle for motor or motor brake output.
Motor Connector (optional)
Pin 1 - T1 (black)
Pin 2 - T2 (white)
Pin 3 - T3 (red)
Pin 4 - Ground (green/yellow)
Source Brake Connector (optional)
Pin 1 - Ground (green/yellow)
Pin 2 - B1(black)
Pin 3 -B2 (white)
Incoming Control Power (optional) – 24V DC Only
Pin 1 – (+V) Unswitched (A3/red)
Pin 2 – (–V) Common (A2/black)
Pin 3 – Not used (green)
Pin 4 – Not used (blank)
Pin 5 – (+V) Switched (A1/blue)
Pin 6 – Not used (white)
Incoming Three-Phase Power (optional)
Pin 1 - L1 (black)
Pin 2 - L2 (white)
Pin 3 - L3 (red)
Pin 4 - Ground (green/yellow)
64
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Optional Locking Clip
Installation and Wiring
Chapter 2
The locking clip is an optional device that can be used, if desired. The clam shell design clips over power quick disconnect connections to limit customer access to disconnection.
Figure 37 -
SHOCK HAZARD:
DO NOT connect or disconnect power or motor connections while power is applied to ArmorStart LT. Proper Lock-Out Tag-Out procedures should be followed to reduced the risk of severe injury.
SHOCK HAZARD:
The ArmorStart LT local disconnect will only isolate the motor power and remove switched power when turned OFF. Power inputs must be switched OFF properly from their respective sources before connection or disconnection of incoming power. Proper Lock-Out Tag-Out procedures should be followed to reduced the risk of severe injury.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
65
Chapter 2
Installation and Wiring
Notes:
66
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
IP Address
Chapter
3
Product Commissioning
Class A
Class B
Class C
The IP address identifies each node on the IP network (or system of connected networks). Each TCP/IP node on a network must have a unique IP address.
The IP address is 32 bits long and has a net ID part and Host ID part. Networks are classified A, B, C, (or other). The class of the network determines how an IP address is formatted.
Figure 38 - IP Address on the IP Network
0
0
0
1 0
0
1 1 0
Net ID
Net ID
7 8
Net ID
15
16
Host ID
Host ID
23
24
Host ID
31
31
31
You can distinguish the class of the IP address from the first integer in its dotted-decimal IP address as follows:
Range of first integer
0…127
128…191
Class
A
B
Range of first integer
192…223
224…255
Class
C other
Each node on the same physical network must have an IP address of the same class and must have the same net ID. Each node on the same network must have a different Host ID thus giving it a unique IP address.
Gateway Address
The Gateway Address is the default address of a network. It provides a single domain name and point of entry to the site. Gateways connect individual physical networks into a system of networks.
Subnet Mask
The subnet mask is used for splitting IP networks into a series of subgroups, or subnets. The mask is a binary pattern that is matched up with the IP address to turn part of the Host ID address field into a field for subnets.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
67
Chapter 3
Product Commissioning
Configuring EtherNet/IP Address
Before using the ArmorStart LT, you may need to configure an IP address, subnet mask, and optional Gateway address. The rotary network address switches found on the front of the ECM, are set to 999 and DHCP is enabled as the factory default. The network Internet Protocol (IP) address can be set one of three ways:
•
Use the switches located on the module
•
Use a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server, such as
Rockwell Automation BootP/DHCP
•
Retrieve a static IP address from nonvolatile memory
The ArmorStart LT reads these switches first at power up or after a reset to determine if they are set to a valid IP address between 1…254. When switches are set to a valid number the IP address will be 192.168.1._ _ _ [switch setting].
If the switches are set to an invalid number (for example, 000 or a value greater than 254 excluding 888), DHCP is enabled. The DHCP server will assign the
IP address and the Transport Control Protocol (TCP) parameters.
The RS Logix 5000 installation provides a BootP/DHCP server found in the Rockwell Software Program folder. Use Rockwell Automation BootP/
DHCP server utility, version 2.3 or later, that ships with RSLogix™ 5000 or RSLinx software.
A third party DHCP server can also be used.
Manually Configure the Network Address Switches
Remove the protective caps from the rotary switches.
Figure 39 - Switches on the I/O module
68
Set the network address by adjusting the three rotary switches on the front of the ECM.
When the IP address switches are valid, the subnet mask will be
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Product Commissioning
Chapter 3
255.255.255.0 and the gateway address is set to 0.0.0.0. A power cycle is required for any new IP address to take effect when the switches are used.
ATTENTION:
To avoid unintended operation, the ArmorStart LT must be assigned a fixed IP address. If a DHCP server is used, it must be configured to assign a fixed IP address for ArmorStart LT.
Failure to observe this precaution may result in unintended machine motion or loss of process control.
Figure 40 - Network Address Example
0 0 0
8
28 28
6 46
X100
X10
46
X1
4
2
This example shows the
IP address set to 000 (DHCP).
Static Address Alternative
If the manual address configuration of 192.168.1.xxx is not acceptable, a static address can be configured using the embedded web page. First configure the switches to a valid address to access the web page. Using a common web browser enter the address 192.168.1._ _ _ (switches). From the Administrative Settings window select Network Configuration. Change the Ethernet Interface
Configuration to “Static” and enter the IP Address, Subnet Mask, and Default
Gateway and apply. Change the ArmorStart LT address switches to 999. The unit will now accept the new IP address. To access the web page you will need to use the new address in the web browser.
The switch value of 888 allows the user to reset to factory default configuration including configuration parameters. This setting is useful in situations where the user wishes to decommission a module or when the user wishes to commission a previously-used module that has an unknown configuration. When the switches are set to 888, upon the next power cycle the ArmorStart LT will return to factory default settings and cease all communications. The Module Status LED shall transition to blinking red and the Network Status LED shall transition to OFF.
After reset, the user will then need to change the IP address to a valid setting and power cycle. The purpose of this is to prevent the user from resetting the module and then never changing the switch setting from 888.
IMPORTANT
Setting the IP address to “888” followed by a power cycle will reset the device to its factory default configuration. To resume network communication the address
MUST
be set to DHCP or a valid IP address and power cycled again.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
69
Chapter 3
Product Commissioning
Using the
Rockwell Automation
BootP/DHCP Utility
The Rockwell Automation BootP/DHCP utility is a stand alone program that incorporates the functionality of standard BootP/DHCP software with a user friendly graphical interface. It is located in the Utils directory on the
RSLogix 5000 installation CD. The ArmorStart LT must have DHCP enabled (factory default) to use the utility.
To configure your adapter using the BootP/DHCP utility, perform the following steps:
1.
Run the BootP/DHCP software.
In the BOOTP/DHCP Request History panel you will see the Ethernet
(Mac) addresses of the devices issuing requests.
Note
: the Ethernet (Mac) address for a device can be found on the product label.
Figure 41 - BOOTP/DHCP Request History Panel
70
2.
Double-click the Ethernet (Mac) address of the device you want to configure.
You will see the New Entry dialog with the device’s Ethernet Address
(MAC).
Figure 42 - New Entry Dialog Box
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Product Commissioning
Chapter 3
3.
Enter the IP Address you want to assign to the device, and click OK.
The device is added to the Relation List, displaying the Ethernet
Address (MAC) and corresponding IP Address, Hostname, and
Description (if applicable).
Figure 43 - Relation List
When the address displays in the IP Address column in the Request
History section, it signifies that the IP address assignment has been made.
4.
To assign this configuration to the device, highlight the device in the
Relation List panel, and click the Disable BOOTP/DHCP button.
When power is cycled to the device, it uses the configuration you assigned and does not issue a DHCP request.
5.
To enable DHCP for a device with DHCP disabled, highlight the device in the Relation List, and click the Enable DHCP button.
You must have an entry for the device in the Relation List panel to re-enable DHCP.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
71
Chapter 3
Product Commissioning
Figure 44 - Enable DHCP Button
Save the Relation List
You can save the Relation List to use later. To save the Relation List perform the following steps:
1.
Select Save As... from the File menu.
Figure 45 - Save Relation List
72
You will see the Save As Dialog.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Figure 46 - Save As Dialog Box
Product Commissioning
Chapter 3
2.
Select the folder you want to Save in.
3.
Enter a File name for the Relation List (for example, Control System
Configuration), and click Save.
You can leave the Save as type at the default setting: Bootp
You can then open the file containing the Relation List at a later session.
When DHCP is enabled (factory default Enabled), the unit will request its network configuration from a DHCP/BOOTP server. Any configuration received from a DHCP server will be stored in non-volatile memory.
The unit will try to obtain the same IP address from the DHCP server. If the server is not present (e.g., server fails to power up), the unit will use the IP address it previously received from the server. The DHCP timeout = 30 s.
Be cautious about using an unmanaged switch to assign the IP address.
A DHCP server typically assigns a finite lease time to the offered IP address. The possibility exists that the ArmorStart LT would be assigned a different IP address which would cause a stop in communication with the controller.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
73
Chapter 3
Product Commissioning
Embedded Web Server
The embedded web server is used to access configuration and status data.
IMPORTANT
The user should set the password to a unique value for authorized personnel.
If the login and password are lost you will need to reset the device to the factory defaults, which results in losing its configuration.
To access the internal web browser, open your computer’s internet browser and enter the IP address of the desired ArmorStart LT (for example, 192.168.1.1).
Figure 47 - Internal Web Browser
From here you are able to view parameter settings, device status, and diagnostics from multiple tab views.
74
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Product Commissioning
Chapter 3
Network Configuration
To access the network configuration, you will be prompted to login to the
Administrative Setting.
Figure 48 - Enter Network Password
The user will be prompted to enter the default User Name (Administrator).
The factory default password is blank. The user is expected to change the password to avoid unauthorized access.
Figure 49 - Network Configurations
From this screen you can change the Ethernet Configuration. For example in the above image the IP address will be changed to 10.10.10.101. Choose
“APPLY Changes” for new settings to take effect.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
75
Chapter 3
Product Commissioning
Parameter Configuration
ArmorStart LT embedded web server provides the user the ability to view and modify the device configuration without having to access RSLogix 5000. To view the device configuration from the web server, select the parameters folder.
Figure 50 -
In the figure above, the Starter Setup parameters are viewed. To modify a parameter the user will click the “Edit” button.
Figure 51 - Enter Network Password
76
The user will be prompted to enter the default User Name (Administrator).
The factory default password is blank. The user is expected to change the
Password to avoid unauthorized access.
E-mail Notification Configuration
ArmorStart LT internal web server will support the e-mailing of warning and trip messages via Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP). The configuration parameters for the SMTP Server’s IP address, user login, and port number are configurable through the Administrative Settings page of the internal web server.
The user will configure the device name, device description, and device trip type.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Figure 52 - E-mail Notification Configuration
Product Commissioning
Chapter 3
E-mail triggers:
•
when a trip occurs
•
when a trip is cleared
•
when a warning occurs
•
when a warning is cleared
IMPORTANT
“Cleared Event” e-mails will only be sent when all events have been cleared and if a trip event e-mail has previously been sent.
The following is an example trip e-mail:
Subject:
Body:
ArmorStart LT 291E 1.1-7.6A has detected an Overload Trip
Trip Snapshot:
SnapShotL1Amps: 1.11 Amps
SnapShotL2Amps: 2.22 Amps
SnapShotL3Amps: 3.33 Amps
SnapShotAveAmps: 2.22 Amps
SnapShot%Thermal: 55%
Trip Type:
Trip Info:
Overload Trip
Load has drawn excessive current based on the trip class selected.
Device Name: ArmorStart LT 291E Test Unit
Device Description:Latest AB On-Machine Offering
Device Location: Sixth Floor Comms Lab
Contact Info: Contact 1 Info: Slicia Turnbull in California
Contact 2 Info: Steve Plummer on Friday
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
77
Chapter 3
Product Commissioning
How to Add a New Module
Using the Add-On Profile
ArmorStart LT is provided with an Add-On Profile (AOP). An Add-on profile streamlines the programming and installation by eliminating the task of individually configuring the device tags and providing an easy to use configuration interface. In addition, the copy and paste function allows easy configuration of multiple ArmorStart LTs with RSLogix™ 5000 revision 17.01 or later. There is a known compatibility issue with revision 20.0. Update RSLogix
5000 to 20.1 or greater.
IMPORTANT
If your version of RSLogix 5000 does not include the AOP for ArmorStart LT, it can be installed from http://support.rockwellautomation.com/controlflash/
LogixProfiler.asp
1. Launch RS Logix 5000
2. From the “I/O Configuration” tree add a “New Module”
78
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Product Commissioning
Chapter 3
3. From the list of modules find the ArmorStart LT using the catalog number.
The AOP will include all options therefore the list will only display the base catalog number.
4. The “General” page is displayed. Enter a descriptive name for the
ArmorStart LT.
5. In the “General” page enter the ArmorStart LT IP address. The “Private
Address” corresponds to the local IP address configurations using the switches.
The “IP Address” is a static address but configured from the webpage. This allows more flexibility in defining the address. If the address is served up, use “Host
Name” field.
6. In the “General” page, select the “Change” button. From here, define what options are available and what discrete point, if any, will need to be defined as an output.
The “General” page of the ArmorStart LT AOP differs from many other product
AOPs. The Module definition allows the user to specify the following items:
•
Electronic Keying: Module Compatibility
•
Configured By: RSLogix 5000 or ArmorStart LT Embedded Web Page
•
Connection Type: Data or Listen Only
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
79
Chapter 3
Product Commissioning
•
User I/O Configuration: Specify the Input or Output use for each I/O point
•
Keypad Option: Is product supplied with this option
•
Electro-Mechanical Brake Option: Is product supplied with this option
The figure below is an example of the Module Definition page.
80
Electronic Keying
The electronic keying feature automatically compares the expected module, as shown in the RSLogix 5000 I/O Configuration tree, to the physical module before I/O communication begins. You can use electronic keying to help prevent communication to a module that does not match the type and revision expected.
Typically, three keying options are available:
•
Exact Match
Exact Match keying requires all keying attributes, that is, Vendor, Product
Type, Product Code (catalog number), Major Revision, and Minor
Revision, of the physical module and the module created in the software to match precisely to establish communication.
•
Compatible Keying
Compatible Keying indicates that the module determines whether to accept or reject communication. Compatible Keying is the default setting.
•
Disable Keying
Disabled Keying indicates the keying attributes are not considered when attempting to communicate with a module.
ATTENTION:
Be extremely cautious when using Disabled Keying; if used incorrectly, this option can lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.
IMPORTANT
Changing electronic keying selections online may cause the I/O communication connection to the module to be disrupted and may result in a loss of data.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Product Commissioning
Chapter 3
Connections
Two Class 1 connections for I/O transfer will be supported and six Class 3 explicit connections will be supported. The Class 1 connections are:
•
Data
•
Listen Only
Only one Data connection is allowed. A maximum of two Listen Only connections are supported (shared with the Data connection). This connection type is dependent on another connection to exist. If that connection (Data) is closed, the listen only connection shall be closed as well.
The connection sizes are:
ArmorStart
Bulletin290E/291E
Bulletin 294E
Connection Type
Input
Output
Input
Output
Connection Size (in bytes)
16
3
18
6
Configured by
The ArmorStart LT may be configured via the ArmorStart LT’s web page or
RS Logix 5000. Often times, customers utilize the web interface to configure the unit before it is ever connected to the PLC. The AOP will require the user to specify how the ArmorStart LT is configured, once added to RS Logix 5000.
The valid options are:
•
“Web Page” — The unit is configured by the ArmorStart LT’s web pages.
The AOP will NOT display any page or content of a page that allows configuration of the unit. In this mode Connection Type will include a
“Backup” and “Restore” feature. The Backup selection will store parameter data in the RSLogix 5000 programming file and in the PLC. The Restore selection will allow the user to manually re-configure a replacement unit.
•
“RSLogix 5000” — The unit is configured by RSLogix 5000. The AOP controls all parameter configurations. Any change made using the webpage will be over written by the PLC configuration. When the user changes the
“Configured By” field from “Web Page” to “RSLogix 5000”, the values stored by the “Backup” function will be copied to the configuration in the PLC. The “Backup/Restore” will no longer be displayed.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
81
Chapter 3
Product Commissioning
HOA Keypad Option
ArmorStart LT units are available with or without an HOA Keypad. The user will specify either “Installed” or “Not Installed”. When a unit is provided without the HOA keypad this setting should be set to “Not Installed” which removes the keypad parameters.
Source Brake, Electro-Mechanical Brake Option
ArmorStart LT units are available with or without an electromechanical (EM) brake. The user will select either “Installed” or “Not Installed”. When a unit is provided without an EM brake the setting should be set to Not Installed which removes the associated parameters.
User Configurable I/O
The ArmorStart LT I/O points may be used as either an input or an output.
The ArmorStart LT hardware does not require the user to specify a point’s actual use as an input or output, but the AOP requires the user to specify it to assign the correct tag name for the I/O point. When a point is configured as an input or output the corresponding tag name is “Pt0_Data”. If a point is configured as an output the corresponding feedback tag name is “Pt0_ReadBack”.
Using the navigation tree on the left, start configuring the ArmorStart LT with the simplified wizard. The minimum configuration is displayed on each page.
Review each field to determine if the default setting is acceptable or modify as appropriate for your application. Note that more advanced properties are available using the “Advance” buttons on the screen.
82
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Product Commissioning
Chapter 3
Once complete the new ArmorStart LT will appear in the Ethernet tree. If there are multiple ArmorStart LTs with similar configurations, utilize the copy-paste function and update only those parameters that change between units.
The final step is to download your project to the controller and the ArmorStart
LT. Define the path to the PLC and then download.
RSLogix 5000 Add-On Profile
The Add-On Profile (AOP) for ArmorStart LT consists of several standard pages and multiple product specific pages for configuration within RS Logix 5000.
In addition the AOP will automatically create descriptive tag names for the input and output assemblies.
The following table lists the available AOPs for ArmorStart LT when adding a new module in RS Logix 5000.
Catalog Number
290E-FAZ
290E-FBZ
291E-FAZ
291E-FBZ
294E-FVD1P5Z
294E-FVD2P5Z
294E-FVD4P2Z
290E-FAP
290E-FBP
291E-FAP
291E-FBP
AOP Description
ArmorStart LT DOL, 0.24…3.5 A, 24V DC
ArmorStart LT DOL, 1.1…7.6 A, 24V DC
ArmorStart LT Reverser, 0.24…3.5 A, 24V DC
ArmorStart LT Reverser, 1.1…7.6 A, 24V DC
ArmorStart LT VFD, 480V AC, 0.5 Hp
ArmorStart LT VFD, 480V AC, 1 Hp
ArmorStart LT VFD, 480V AC, 2 Hp
ArmorStart LT DOL, 0.24…3.5 A, IPS
ArmorStart LT DOL, 1.1…7.6 A, IPS
ArmorStart LT Reverser, 0.24…3.5 A, IPS
ArmorStart LT Reverser, 1.1…7.6 A, IPS
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
83
Chapter 3
Product Commissioning
Catalog Number
294E-FVD1P5P
294E-FVD2P5P
294E-FVD4P2P
AOP Description
ArmorStart LT VFD, 480V AC, 0.5 Hp, IPS
ArmorStart LT VFD, 480V AC, 1 Hp, IPS
ArmorStart LT VFD, 480V AC, 2 Hp, IPS
The AOP presents an organized view of parameters within groups and specific functional pages. All of the parameters are distributed within the AOP pages.
Each page includes basic information that must be reviewed by the user.
In addition, within each page there are capabilities that can be accessed using the advance buttons.
The AOP page below is an example of the “Advanced” button that provides the user additional functionality.
84
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Product Commissioning
Chapter 3
Auto-Generated Tags
After you install and configure the AOP, the controller tags are generated. The tag names are descriptive and automatically generated. This greatly simplifies programming. The figure below shows an example of the auto-generated tags for ArmorStart LT
.
The following tables provide more clarification regarding the Produce and
Consume assemblies and how they correlate with the auto-generated names.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
85
Chapter 3
Product Commissioning
Table 10 - Default Consume Assembly for Bulletin 294E
Instance 154 “Drive Cmd” – Default Consumed Assembly for Bulletin 294 Starters
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5
0
1 Decel2 Accel2
Out05
Bit 4
JogReverse
Out04
4
5
2
3
6
7
Pt07DeviceIn
Pt15DeviceIn
Pt06DeviceIn
Pt14DeviceIn
Pt05DeviceIn
Pt13DeviceIn
Bit 3
JogForward
Out03
CommandFreq (Low) (xxx.x Hz)
CommandFreq (High) (xxx.x Hz)
Pt04DeviceIn
Pt12DeviceIn
Pt03DeviceIn
Pt11DeviceIn
AnalogDeviceIn (low byte)
AnalogDeviceIn (high byte)
Table 11 - Bulletin 294E Consume Assembly Command Tags
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
Device Name
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
Pt00DeviceIn
Pt01DeviceIn
Pt02DeviceIn
Pt03DeviceIn
Pt04DeviceIn
Pt05DeviceIn
Pt06DeviceIn
Pt07DeviceIn
Pt08DeviceIn
Pt09DeviceIn
Pt10DeviceIn
Pt11DeviceIn
Pt12DeviceIn
Pt13DeviceIn
Name
RunForward
RunReverse
ResetFault
JogForward
JogReverse
Pt00Data
Pt01Data
Pt02Data
Pt03Data
Pt04Data
Pt05Data
Accel2
Decel2
FreqCommand
Logix Tag Name
ASLT_DEMO:O.RunForward
ASLT_DEMO:O.RunReverse
ASLT_DEMO:O.ResetFault
ASLT_DEMO:O.JogForward
ASLT_DEMO:O.JogReverse
ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt00Data
ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt01Data
ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt02Data
ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt03Data
ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt04Data
ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt05Data
ASLT_DEMO:O.Accel2
ASLT_DEMO:O.Decel2
ASLT_DEMO:O.FreqCommand
ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt00DeviceIn
ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt01DeviceIn
ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt02DeviceIn
ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt03DeviceIn
ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt04DeviceIn
ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt05DeviceIn
ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt06DeviceIn
ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt07DeviceIn
ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt08DeviceIn
ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt09DeviceIn
ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt10DeviceIn
ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt11DeviceIn
ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt12DeviceIn
ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt13DeviceIn
Bit 2
ResetFault
Out02
Bit 1
RunReverse
Out01
Bit 0
RunForward
Out00
Pt02DeviceIn
Pt10DeviceIn
Pt01DeviceIn
Pt09DeviceIn
Pt00DeviceIn
Pt08DeviceIn
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
INT
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Data Type
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Style
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
86
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Product Commissioning
Chapter 3
Device Name
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
Name
Pt14DeviceIn
Pt15DeviceIn
Int00DeviceIn
Logix Tag Name
ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt14DeviceIn
ASLT_DEMO:O.Pt15DeviceIn
ASLT_DEMO:O.Int00DeviceIn
Data Type
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Table 12 - Default Produce Assembly for Bulletin 294E
15
16
13
14
11
12
9
10
Instance 156 “Drive Status” - Produced Assembly for Bulletin 294 Starters
Byte
0
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5
3
4
1
2
AtReference
BrakeStatus
NetRefStatus
DisconnectClosed
NetControlStatus
7
8
5
6
Pt05
Pt07DeviceOut
Pt15DeviceOut
Pt06DeviceOut
Pt14DeviceOut
Pt05DeviceOut
Pt13DeviceOut
23
24
21
22
19
20
17
18
27
28
25
26
31
32
29
30
33
➊
PLC Communication Fault Only
Bit 4 Bit 3
Reserved - (name):I.ConnectionFault
➊
Reserved - (name):I.ConnectionFault
➊
Reserved - (name):I.ConnectionFault
➊
Reserved - (name):I.ConnectionFault
➊
Ready
KeyPadJogging
RunningReverse
OutputFrequency (Low) (xxx.x Hz)
OutputFrequency (High) (xxx.x Hz)
Pt04
Pt04DeviceOut
Pt12DeviceOut
KeyPadHand
Pt03
Pt03DeviceOut
Pt11DeviceOut
AnalogDeviceOut (low byte)
AnalogDeviceOut (high byte)
Param3 — OutputCurrent
Param 4 — OutputVoltage
Param 5 — DCBusVoltage
Param 11 — SwitchedVolts (OutputSourceV, IPS units)
Param 12 — UnswitchedVolts (SensorSourceV, IPS units)
Param 13 — InternalFanRPM
Param 14 — ElapesedRunTime
Param 15 — DriveTemperature
Param 16 — TripStatus
Param 17 — WarningStatus
Bit 2
RunningForward
KeyPadOff
Pt02
Pt02DeviceOut
Pt10DeviceOut
Bit 1
WarningPresent
KeyPadAuto
Pt01
Pt01DeviceOut
Pt09DeviceOut
Style
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Bit 0
TripPresent
DLXEnabled
Pt00
Pt00DeviceOut
Pt08DeviceOut
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
87
Chapter 3
Product Commissioning
Table 13 - Bulletin 294E Produced Assembly Status Tags
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
Device Name
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
Pt08DeviceOut
Pt09DeviceOut
Pt10DeviceOut
Pt11DeviceOut
Pt12DeviceOut
Pt13DeviceOut
Pt14DeviceOut
Pt15DeviceOut
Int00DeviceOut
OutputCurrent
OutputVoltage
BrakeContactorStatus
OutputFrequency
Pt00Data
Pt01Data
Pt02Data
Pt03Data
Pt04Data
Pt05Data
Pt00DeviceOut
Pt01DeviceOut
Pt02DeviceOut
Pt03DeviceOut
Pt04DeviceOut
Pt05DeviceOut
Pt06DeviceOut
Pt07DeviceOut
Name
Fault
TripPresent
WarningPresent
RunningForward
RunningReverse
Ready
NetworkControlStatus
NetworkReferenceStatus
AtReference
DeviceLogixEnabled
KeypadAuto
KeypadOff
KeypadHand
KeypadJogging
DisconnectClosed
Logix Tag Name
ASLT_DEMO:I.Fault
ASLT_DEMO:I.TripPresent
ASLT_DEMO:I.WarningPresent
ASLT_DEMO:I.RunningForward
ASLT_DEMO:I.RunningReverse
ASLT_DEMO:I.Ready
ASLT_DEMO:I.NetworkControlStatus
ASLT_DEMO:I.NetworkReferenceStatus
ASLT_DEMO:I.AtReference
ASLT_DEMO:I.DeviceLogixEnabled
ASLT_DEMO:I.KeypadAuto
ASLT_DEMO:I.KeypadOff
ASLT_DEMO:I.KeypadHand
ASLT_DEMO:I.KeypadJogging
ASLT_DEMO:I.DisconnectClosed
ASLT_DEMO:I.BrakeContactorStatus
ASLT_DEMO:I.OutputFrequency
ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt00Data
ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt01Data
ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt02Data
ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt03Data
ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt04Data
ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt05Data
ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt00DeviceOut
ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt01DeviceOut
ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt02DeviceOut
ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt03DeviceOut
ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt04DeviceOut
ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt05DeviceOut
ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt06DeviceOut
ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt07DeviceOut
ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt08DeviceOut
ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt09DeviceOut
ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt10DeviceOut
ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt11DeviceOut
ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt12DeviceOut
ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt13DeviceOut
ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt14DeviceOut
ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt15DeviceOut
ASLT_DEMO:I.Int00DeviceOut
ASLT_DEMO:I.OutputCurrent
ASLT_DEMO:I.OutputVoltage
88
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Style
Binary
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
INT
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Data Type
DINT
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
INT
INT
INT
Device Name
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
ASLT_DEMO
Name
DCBusVoltage
SwitchedVoltageLevel
UnswitchedVoltageLevel
InternalFanRPM
OperatingHours
DriveTemperature
TripStatus
WarningStatus
Logix Tag Name
ASLT_DEMO:I.DCBusVoltage
ASLT_DEMO:I.SwitchedVoltageLevel
ASLT_DEMO:I.UnswitchedVoltageLevel
ASLT_DEMO:I.InternalFanRPM
ASLT_DEMO:I.OperatingHours
ASLT_DEMO:I.DriveTemperature
ASLT_DEMO:I.TripStatus
ASLT_DEMO:I.WarningStatus
Table 14 - Bulletin 294E Consume Assembly/Command Tag Explanation
Pt01DeviceIn
Pt02DeviceIn
Pt03DeviceIn
Pt04DeviceIn
Pt05DeviceIn
Pt06DeviceIn
Pt07DeviceIn
Pt08DeviceIn
Pt09DeviceIn
Pt10DeviceIn
Pt11DeviceIn
Pt12DeviceIn
Pt13DeviceIn
Pt14DeviceIn
Pt15DeviceIn
Int00DeviceIn
Device Output Command Tags
RunForward
RunReverse
ResetFault
JogForward
JogReverse
Pt00Data
Pt01Data
Pt02Data
Pt03Data
Pt04Data
Pt05Data
Accel2
Decel2
FreqCommand
Pt00DeviceIn
Tag Description/Use
Command VFD forward
Command VFD reverse
Fault reset
Command Jog forward per internal frequency
Command Jog reverse per internal frequency
If user defined as output, commnd output ON
If user defined as output, commnd output ON
If user defined as output, commnd output ON
If user defined as output, commnd output ON
If user defined as output, commnd output ON
If user defined as output, commnd output ON
VFD acceleration ramp 2
VFD deceleration ramp 2
Logix command frequency
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network analog input to DeviceLogix engine
Data Type
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
Product Commissioning
Chapter 3
Style
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Binary
Binary
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
89
Chapter 3
Product Commissioning
90
Table 15 - Bulletin 294E Produced Assembly/Status Tag Explanation
Pt08DeviceOut
Pt09DeviceOut
Pt10DeviceOut
Pt11DeviceOut
Pt12DeviceOut
Pt13DeviceOut
Pt14DeviceOut
Pt15DeviceOut
Int00DeviceOut
OutputCurrent
OutputVoltage
BrakeContactorStatus
OutputFrequency
Pt00Data
Pt01Data
Pt02Data
Pt03Data
Pt04Data
Pt05Data
Pt00DeviceOut
Pt01DeviceOut
Pt02DeviceOut
Pt03DeviceOut
Pt04DeviceOut
Pt05DeviceOut
Pt06DeviceOut
Pt07DeviceOut
Device Input Status Tags
Fault
TripPresent
WarningPresent
RunningForward
RunningReverse
Ready
NetworkControlStatus
NetworkReferenceStatus
AtReference
DeviceLogixEnabled
KeypadAuto
KeypadOff
KeypadHand
KeypadJogging
DisconnectClosed
Tag Description/Use
Communication fault between PLC and device (all 1s = fault, all 0s = normal)
Fault exists within unit
Warning of potential fault
Motor commanded to run forward
Motor commanded to run reverse
Control and 3-phase power present
Start and Stop command comes from network (PLC or Connected Explicit Messaging)
Speed reference comes from the network (not DeviceLogix)
At commanded speed reference
DeviceLogix is enabled
HOA is in Auto mode
HOA is in Off mode
HOA is in Hand mode
HOA is in Jog mode
Disconnect is closed
Source brake contactor status (1 = close, 0 = open)
VFD frequency
User-configured I/O status
User-configured I/O status
User-configured I/O status
User-configured I/O status
ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt04Data
User-configured I/O status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network analog output
VFD output current — Parameter 3
VFD output voltage — Parameter 4
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Device Input Status Tags
DCBusVoltage
SwitchedVoltageLevel
UnswitchedVoltageLevel
InternalFanRPM
OperatingHours
DriveTemperature
TripStatus
WarningStatus
Product Commissioning
Chapter 3
Tag Description/Use
VFD DC bus voltage — Parameter 5
Switched control power voltage — Parameter 11
Unswitched control power voltage — Parameter 12
VFD fan speed — Parameter 13
Elapse run hours — Parameter 14
VFD internal temperature — Parameter 15
Bit enumerate trip status — Parameter 16
Bit enumerate warning status — Parameter 17
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
91
Chapter 3
Product Commissioning
Table 16 - Default Consume Assembly for Bulletin 290E/291E
Instance 150 “Starter Cmd” - DeviceLogix Consumed Assembly for Bulletin 290 / 291 Starters
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
0
1
Out05
Out04
2
3
4
5
Pt07DeviceIn
Pt15DeviceIn
Pt06DeviceIn
Pt14DeviceIn
Pt05DeviceIn
Pt13DeviceIn
Bit 3
Pt04DeviceIn
Pt12DeviceIn
Out03
Pt03DeviceIn
Pt11DeviceIn
AnalogDeviceIn (low byte)
AnalogDeviceIn (high byte)
Table 17 - Bulletin 290E/291E Consume Assembly Command Tags
Pt05DeviceIn
Pt06DeviceIn
Pt07DeviceIn
Pt08DeviceIn
Pt09DeviceIn
Pt10DeviceIn
Pt11DeviceIn
Pt12DeviceIn
Pt13DeviceIn
Pt14DeviceIn
Pt15DeviceIn
Int00DeviceIn
Name
RunForward
RunReverse
ResetFault
Pt00Data
Pt01Data
Pt02Data
Pt03Data
Pt04Data
Pt05Data
Pt00DeviceIn
Pt01DeviceIn
Pt02DeviceIn
Pt03DeviceIn
Pt04DeviceIn
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
Device Name
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
Logix Tag Name
DEMO_REV:O.RunForward
DEMO_REV:O.RunReverse
DEMO_REV:O.ResetFault
DEMO_REV:O.Pt00Data
DEMO_REV:O.Pt01Data
DEMO_REV:O.Pt02Data
DEMO_REV:O.Pt03Data
DEMO_REV:O.Pt04Data
DEMO_REV:O.Pt05Data
DEMO_REV:O.Pt00DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt01DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt02DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt03DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt04DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt05DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt06DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt07DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt08DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt09DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt10DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt11DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt12DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt13DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt14DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Pt15DeviceIn
DEMO_REV:O.Int00DeviceIn
Bit 2
ResetFault
Out02
Pt02DeviceIn
Pt10DeviceIn
Bit 1
RunReverse
Out01
Pt01DeviceIn
Pt09DeviceIn
Bit 0
RunForward
Out00
Pt00DeviceIn
Pt08DeviceIn
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
INT
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Data Type
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Style
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
92
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Product Commissioning
Chapter 3
Table 18 - Bulletin 290E/291E Starters Starter Stat Produced Assembly
20
21
18
19
16
17
14
15
Instance 152 “Starter Stat” - Produced Assembly for Bulletin 290E / 291E Starters
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5
0
1
2
3
Bit 4 Bit 3
Reserved - (name):I.ConnectionFault
➊
Reserved - (name):I.ConnectionFault
➊
Reserved - (name):I.ConnectionFault
➊
Reserved - (name):I.ConnectionFault
➊
4
5
CurrentFlowing
DisconnectClosed
NetControlStatus Ready RunningReverse
KeyPadHand
Pt05 Pt04 Pt03
8
9
6
7
10
11
12
13
Pt07DeviceOut
Pt15DeviceOut
Pt06DeviceOut
Pt14DeviceOut
Pt05DeviceOut
Pt13DeviceOut
Pt04DeviceOut
Pt12DeviceOut
Pt03DeviceOut
Pt11DeviceOut
AnalogDeviceOut (low byte)
AnalogDeviceOut (high byte)
Param 1— PhaseL1Current
Param 2— PhaseL2Current
Param 3— PhaseL3Current
Param 4— AverageCurrent
Param 5—%ThermalUtilized
24
25
22
23
26
27
28
29
➊
PLC Communication Fault Only
Param 11 — SwitchedVolts (OutputSourceV, IPS units)
Param 12 — UnswitchedVolts (SensorSourceV, IPS units)
Param 16 — TripStatus
Param 17 — WarningStatus
Bit 2
RunningForward
KeyPadOff
Pt02
Pt02DeviceOut
Pt10DeviceOut
Table 19 - Bulletin 290E/291E Produced Assembly Status Tags
Device Name
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
Name
Fault
TripPresent
WarningPresent
RunningForward
RunningReverse
Ready
CurrentFlowing
Logix Tag Name
DEMO_REV:I.Fault
DEMO_REV:I.TripPresent
DEMO_REV:I.WarningPresent
DEMO_REV:I.RunningForward
DEMO_REV:I.RunningReverse
DEMO_REV:I.Ready
DEMO_REV:I.CurrentFlowing
Bit 1
WarningPresent
KeyPadAuto
Pt01
Pt01DeviceOut
Pt09DeviceOut
Data Type
DINT
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Bit 0
TripPresent
DLXEnabled
Pt00
Pt00DeviceOut
Pt08DeviceOut
Style
Binary
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
93
Chapter 3
Product Commissioning
Pt02DeviceOut
Pt03DeviceOut
Pt04DeviceOut
Pt05DeviceOut
Pt06DeviceOut
Pt07DeviceOut
Pt08DeviceOut
Pt09DeviceOut
Pt10DeviceOut
Pt11DeviceOut
Pt12DeviceOut
Pt13DeviceOut
Pt14DeviceOut
Pt15DeviceOut
Int00DeviceOut
L1Current
Name
DeviceLogixEnabled
KeypadAuto
KeypadOff
KeypadHand
DisconnectClosed
Pt00Data
Pt01Data
Pt02Data
Pt03Data
Pt04Data
Pt05Data
Pt00DeviceOut
Pt01DeviceOut
L2Current
L3Current
AvgCurrent
PercentTCU
SwitchedVoltageLevel
UnswitchedVoltageLevel
TripStatus
WarningStatus
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
Device Name
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
DEMO_REV
Logix Tag Name
DEMO_REV:I.DeviceLogixEnabled
DEMO_REV:I.KeypadAuto
DEMO_REV:I.KeypadOff
DEMO_REV:I.KeypadHand
DEMO_REV:I.DisconnectClosed
DEMO_REV:I.Pt00Data
DEMO_REV:I.Pt01Data
DEMO_REV:I.Pt02Data
DEMO_REV:I.Pt03Data
DEMO_REV:I.Pt04Data
DEMO_REV:I.Pt05Data
DEMO_REV:I.Pt00DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Pt01DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Pt02DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Pt03DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Pt04DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Pt05DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Pt06DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Pt07DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Pt08DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Pt09DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Pt10DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Pt11DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Pt12DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Pt13DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Pt14DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Pt15DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.Int00DeviceOut
DEMO_REV:I.L1Current
DEMO_REV:I.L2Current
DEMO_REV:I.L3Current
DEMO_REV:I.AvgCurrent
DEMO_REV:I.PercentTCU
DEMO_REV:I.SwitchedVoltageLevel
DEMO_REV:I.UnswitchedVoltageLevel
DEMO_REV:I.TripStatus
DEMO_REV:I.WarningStatus
94
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Binary
Binary
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Style
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
Decimal
BOOL
BOOL
INT
INT
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Data Type
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Product Commissioning
Chapter 3
The following table provides a brief explanation for the tag function:
Table 20 - Bulletin 290E/291E Consume Assembly Command Tag Explanation
Pt05DeviceIn
Pt06DeviceIn
Pt07DeviceIn
Pt08DeviceIn
Pt09DeviceIn
Pt10DeviceIn
Pt11DeviceIn
Pt12DeviceIn
Pt13DeviceIn
Pt14DeviceIn
Pt15DeviceIn
Int00DeviceIn
Device Output Command Tags
RunForward
RunReverse
ResetFault
Pt00Data
Pt01Data
Pt02Data
Pt03Data
Pt04Data
Pt05Data
Pt00DeviceIn
Pt01DeviceIn
Pt02DeviceIn
Pt03DeviceIn
Pt04DeviceIn
Tag Description/Use
Command VFD forward
Command VFD reverse
Fault reset
If user defined as output, commnd output ON
If user defined as output, commnd output ON
If user defined as output, commnd output ON
If user defined as output, commnd output ON
If user defined as output, commnd output ON
If user defined as output, commnd output ON
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network input to DeviceLogix engine
Network analog input to DeviceLogix engine
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
95
Chapter 3
Product Commissioning
96
Table 21 - Bulletin 290E/291E Produced Assembly Status Tag Explanation
Pt03Data
Pt04Data
Pt05Data
Pt00DeviceOut
Pt01DeviceOut
Pt02DeviceOut
Pt03DeviceOut
Pt04DeviceOut
Pt05DeviceOut
Pt06DeviceOut
Pt07DeviceOut
Pt08DeviceOut
Pt09DeviceOut
Pt10DeviceOut
Pt11DeviceOut
Pt12DeviceOut
Device Input Status Tags
Fault
TripPresent
WarningPresent
RunningForward
RunningReverse
Ready
CurrentFlowing
DeviceLogixEnabled
KeypadAuto
KeypadOff
KeypadHand
DisconnectClosed
Pt00Data
Pt01Data
Pt02Data
Pt13DeviceOut
Pt14DeviceOut
Pt15DeviceOut
Int00DeviceOut
L1Current
L2Current
L3Current
AvgCurrent
PercentTCU
SwitchedVoltageLevel
Tag Description/Use
Communication fault between PLC and device (all 1s = fault, all 0s = normal)
Fault exists within unit
Warning of potential fault
Motor commanded to run forward
Motor commanded to run reverse
Control and 3-phase power present
Current is passing to motor
DeviceLogix is enabled
HOA is in Auto mode
HOA is in Off mode
HOA is in Hand mode
Disconnect is closed
User-configured I/O status
User-configured I/O status
User-configured I/O status
User-configured I/O status
ASLT_DEMO:I.Pt04Data
User-configured I/O status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network output status
DeviceLogix network analog output
Phase A current
Phase B current
Phase C current
Average phase A, B, and C current
Overload percentage thermal utilization (100% = overload trip)
Switched control power voltage — Parameter 11
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Device Input Status Tags
UnswitchedVoltageLevel
TripStatus
WarningStatus
Product Commissioning
Chapter 3
Tag Description/Use
Unswitched control power voltage — Parameter 12
Bit enumerate trip status — Parameter 16
Bit enumerate warning status — Parameter 17
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
97
Chapter 3
Product Commissioning
Notes:
98
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Chapter
4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E
Programmable Parameters
Electronic Data Sheet (EDS)
When a 3rd party PLC is used, an embedded EDS file can be uploaded directly from the ArmorStart LT. This allows device configuration through 3rd party tools. EDS files are also available on the internet at: http://www.ab.com/ networks/eds .
Basic Setup Parameters
When the RSLogix AOP is not used, Table 22 lists the minimum setup configurations required for Bulletin 290E/291E or Bulletin 294E. Basic parameter configuration, status, and diagnostic information can be accessed from the embedded web browser.
RSLogix 5000 is the recommended commissioning software. Download the Add-
On-Profile (AOP) from http://support.rockwellautomation.com/controlflash/Logix
Profiler.asp
for additional functionality. There are additional capabilities that are not enabled or left at their default values.
Table 22 - Quick Parameter Setup
Bulletin 290E/291E
28
FLASetting
29
OLResetLevel
30
OverloadClass
49
IOPointConfiguration
Bulletin 294E
28
MotorNPVolts
29
MotorNPHertz
30
MotorOLCurrent
32
StopMode
34
MinimumFreq
35
MaximumFreq
36
AccelTime1
37
DecelTime1
49
IOPointConfiguration
➊
➊
When using the AOP this parameter is configured during module definition on the “General” page.
IMPORTANT
All I/O points are configured as inputs, by default. Identify which points are outputs, when needed for proper operation, using parameter 49
[IOPointConfiguration].
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
99
Chapter 4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
1
PhaseL1Current
2
PhaseL2Current
3
PhaseL3Current
4
AverageCurrent
5
%ThermalUtilized
6
StarterStatus
7
StarterCommand
8
AuxIOStatus
9
NetworkStatus
10
DLXControlStatus
11
OutputSourceV
12
SensorSourceV
13
Reserved
14
Reserved
15
Reserved
Bulletin
290E/291E Units
Bulletin 294E Units
Basic Status
1
OutputFreq
2
CommandFreq
3
OutputCurrent
4
OutputVoltage
5
DCBusVoltage
6
StarterStatus
7
StarterCommand
8
AuxIOStatus
9
NetworkStatus
10
DLXControlStatus
11
OutputSourceV
12
SensorSourceV
13
InternalFanRPM
14
ElapsedRunTime
15
DriveTemperature
Parameter Groups
Common to Bulletin 290E/291E and Bulletin 294E Units
16
TripStatus
17
WarningStatus
18
TripLog0
19
TripLog1
Bulletin
290E/291E Units
Trip Status
20
TripLog2
21
TripLog3
22
TripLog4
Bulletin 294E Units
23
SnapShotL1Amps
24
SnapShotL2Amps
25
SnapShotL3Amps
26
SnapShotAvgAmps
27
SnapShot%Thermal
Trip Status
23
SnapShotOutFreq
24
SnapShotOutAmps
25
SnapShotOutVolts
26
SnapShotBusVolts
27
SnapShotDrvTemp
Bulletin
290E/291E Units
Basic Config
28
FLASetting
29
OLResetLevel
30
OverloadClass
31
…
40
Reserved
100
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 4
Bulletin 294E Units
Motor and Control
28
MotorNPVolts
29
MotorNPHertz
30
MotorOLCurrent
31
CurrentLimit
32
StopMode
Speed Control
33
SpeedReference
34
MinimumFreq
35
MaximumFreq
36
AccelTime1
37
DecelTime1
38
SCurvePercent
39
JogFrequency
40
JogAccelDecel
Bulletin
290E/291E Units
Bulletin 294E Units
Advanced Config.
69
OLWarningLevel
70
JamInhibitTime
71
JamTripDelay
72
JamTripLevel
73
JamWarningLevel
74
StallEnabledTime
75
StallTripLevel
76
ULInhibitTime
77
ULTripDelay
78
ULTripLevel
79
ULWarningLevel
69
AccelTime2
70
DecelTime2
71
MotorOLRetention
72
InternalFreq
73
SkipFrequency
74
SkipFreqBand
75
DCBrakeTime
76
DCBrakeLevel
77
ReverseDisable
78
FlyingStartEna
79
Compensation
80
SlipHertzAtFLA
81
BusRegulateMode
82
MotorOLSelect
83
SWCurrentTrip
84
AutoRestartTries
85
AutoRestartDelay
86
BoostSelect
87
MaximumVoltage
88
MotorNamPlateFLA
89
BrakeMode
90
BrakeFreqThresh
91
BrakeCurrThresh
Starter Protection
41
ProtFltResetMode
42
ProtectFltEnable
43
WarningEnable
44
ProtectFltReset
45
RunNetFltAction
46
RunNetFaultValue
47
RunNetIdleAction
48
RunNetIdleValue
Common to Bulletin 290E/291E and Bulletin 294E Units
User I/O Config.
Miscellaneous Config.
49
IOPointConfigure
50
FilterOffOn
51
FilterOnOff
52
OutProtFltState
53
OutProtFltValue
54
OutNetFaultState
55
OutNetFaultValue
56
OutNetIdleState
57
OutNetIdleValue
58
Input00Function
59
Input01Function
60
Input02Function
61
Input03Function
62
Input04Function
63
Input05Function
64
NetworkOverride
65
CommsOverride
66
KeypadMode
67
KeypadDisable
68
SetToDefaults
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
101
Chapter 4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
ArmorStart LT EtherNet/IP
Parameters
Introduction
This chapter describes each programmable parameter and its function.
Parameter Programming
Each Distributed Motor Controller type will have a common set of parameters and a set of parameters that pertain to the individual starter type. Parameters
41
…
68 are common to all ArmorStart LTs.
IMPORTANT
Parameter setting changes take effect immediately unless otherwise noted in the parameter listing. These changes maybe immediate even during the
"running" status.
Bulletin 290E/291E Basic Status Group
PhaseL1Current
This parameter determines the actual
Phase L1 current.
PhaseL2Current
This parameter determines the actual
Phase L2 current.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
2
GET
INT
Basic Status x.xx Amps
0
32767
0
1
GET
INT
Basic Status x.xx Amps
0
32767
0
102
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
PhaseL3Current
This parameter determines the actual
Phase L3 current.
AverageCurrent
This parameter determines the average of
3 Phase currents.
%ThermalUtilized
This parameter determines the percent of
Thermal Capacity used.
StarterStatus
This parameter provides the status of the starter.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 4
6
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
0x4FBF
0
5
GET
USINT
Basic Status
Percent
0
100
0
4
GET
INT
Basic Status x.xx Amps
0
32767
0
3
GET
INT
Basic Status x.xx Amps
0
32767
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
103
Chapter 4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X
X
—
Function
TripPresent
WarningPresent
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — RunningForward
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — RunningReverse
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — Ready
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — NetControlStatus
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — —
Reserved
CurrentFlowing
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — —
DLXEnabled
KeyPadAuto
KeyPadOff
KeyPadHand
— — X X — — — — — — — — — — — — Reserved
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — DisconnectClosed
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — Reserved
StarterCommand
The parameter provides the Run Command status to the starter.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
7
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
0x3F07
0
104
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 4
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — —
— — — — — — — — X X X X X — — —
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X X — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Function
RunForward
RunReverse
ResetFault
Reserved
Out00
Out01
Out02
Out03
Out04
Out05
Reserved
AuxIOStatus
The parameter provides the status of hardware input/output points.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
8
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
0x3F
0
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — —
X X X X X X X X X X — — — — — —
Function
Pt00
Pt01
Pt02
Pt03
Pt04
Pt05
Reserved
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
105
Chapter 4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
106
NetworkStatus
The parameter provides the status of the network connections.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
9
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
0xDF
0
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — —
X X X X X X X X — — — — — — — —
Function:
ExplicitCnxn
I/OConnection
ExplicitCnxnFlt
IOCnxnFault
IOCnxnIdle
Reserve
DLREnabled
DLRFault
Reserved
DLXControlStatus
The parameter provides the DeviceLogix
Control Status.
0 = Controlled in Logix programs.
1 = Controlled in local DLX programs.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Bit
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
— — — — — — —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
X —
— —
0
X
— — — —
— — — X
— —
— X
X
X
—
—
—
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— — — — — — —
Function:
RunForward
RunReverse
Out00
Out01
Out02
Out03
Out04
Out05
10
GET
UINT
Basic Status
—
0
OXFF
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
OutputSourceV (IPS)
[SwitchedVolts]
This parameter determines the incoming switched control voltage across terminals
A1…A2.
(IPS) Available voltage on User Output Pin
4 for all I/O points
SensorSourceV (IPS)
[UnswitchedVolts]
This parameter determines the incoming unswitched control voltage across terminals A2…A3.
(IPS) Available voltage on Input Sensor
Source Pin 1 for all I/O points
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Trip Status Group
TripStatus
This parameter provides the fault condition that caused any current trip.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 4
12
GET
UINT
Basic Status x.xx Volts
0
65535
0
11
GET
UINT
Basic Status x.xx Volts
0
65535
0
16
GET
WORD
Trip Status
—
0
0xE3BF
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
107
Chapter 4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
108
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X
X
—
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — —
Function
OverloadTrip
PhaseLossTrip
UnderPowerTrip
SensorShortTrip
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — PhaseImbalanceTrip
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — NonVolMemoryTrip
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — —
Reserved
JamTrip
StallTrip
UnderloadTrip
— — — X X X — — — — — — — — — — Reserved
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — — OutputShortTrip
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — UserDefinedTrip
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — HardwareFltTrip
WarningStatus
This parameter provides the current warning condition.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
17
GET
WORD
Trip Status
—
0
0xC295
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X
X
—
Function
OverloadWarning
Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — UnderPowerWarn
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — PhaseImbalanceWarn
— — — — — — — — — X X — — — — — Reserved
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — —
JamWarning
Reserved
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — — UnderloadWarning
— — X X X X — — — — — — — — — — Reserved
—
X
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — UnswitchedPwrWarn
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — ConfigWarning
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 4
TripLog1
This parameter provides the last trip to occur.
TripLog2
This parameter provides the second last trip to occur.
TripLog3
This parameter provides the third last trip to occur.
TripLog4
This parameter provides the fourth last trip to occur.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
21
GET
UINT
Trip Status
—
0
75
0
20
GET
UINT
Trip Status
—
0
75
0
19
GET
UINT
Trip Status
—
0
75
0
18
GET
UINT
Trip Status
—
0
75
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
109
Chapter 4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
TripLog5
This parameter provides the fifth last trip to occur.
SnapShotL1Amps
This parameter provides a snapshot of actual Phase L1 current at time of last trip.
SnapShotL2Amps
This parameter provides a snapshot of actual Phase L2 current at time of last trip.
SnapShotL3Amps
This parameter provides a snapshot of actual Phase L3 current at time of last trip.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
25
GET
INT
Trip Status x.xx Amps
0
32767
0
24
GET
INT
Trip Status x.xx Amps
0
32767
0
23
GET
INT
Trip Status x.xx Amps
0
32767
22
GET
UINT
Trip Status
—
0
75
0
110
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
SnapShotLAvgAmps
This parameter provides a snapshot of average of 3 Phase currents at time of last trip.
SnapShot%Thermal
This parameter provides a snapshot of the percentage of Thermal Capacity used at time of last trip.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Basic Configuration Group
FLASetting
The motor’s full load current rating is programmed in this parameter.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Table 23 - FLA Setting Ranges and Default Values (with indicated setting precision)
CatNo
290E/1_-FA_*
290E/1_-FB_*
460V AC
3 Hp
5 Hp
FLA Current Range (A)
Minimum Value
0.24
1.1
Maximum Value
3.5
7.6
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 4
27
GET
USINT
Trip Status
Percent
0
100
0
26
GET
INT
Trip Status x.xx Amps
0
32767
0
28
GET/SET
INT
Basic Configuration x.xx Amps
Default Value
0.24
1.1
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
111
Chapter 4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
OLResetLevel
This parameter determines the % Thermal
Capacity which an overload can be cleared.
OverloadClass
This parameter provides the overload trip classification.
1 = 10
2 = 15
3 = 20
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Starter Protection Group
ProtFltResetMode
This parameter configures the Protection
Fault reset mode.
0 = Manual
1 = Automatic
TripStatus
This parameter provides the fault condition that caused any current trip.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
29
GET/SET
BYTE
Basic Configuration
% TCU
75
100
75
30
GET
USINT
Basic Configuration
3
1
—
1
41
GET/SET
BOOL
Starter Protection
1
0
—
0
42
GET
WORD
Trip Status
—
0
0xE3BF
0
112
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 4
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X
X
—
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — —
Function
OverloadTrip
PhaseLossTrip
UnderPowerTrip
SensorShortTrip
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — PhaseImbalanceTrip
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — NonVolMemoryTrip
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — —
Reserved
JamTrip
StallTrip
UnderloadTrip
— — — X X X — — — — — — — — — — Reserved
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — — OutputShortTrip
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — UserDefinedTrip
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — HardwareFltTrip
The highlighted functions are enabled by default.
WarningStatus
This parameter provides the current warning condition.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
43
GET
WORD
Trip Status
—
0
0xC295
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
113
Chapter 4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X
X
—
Function
OverloadWarning
Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — UnderPowerWarn
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — PhasImbalanceWarn
— — — — — — — — — X X — — — — — Reserved
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — —
JamWarning
Reserved
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — — UnderloadWarning
— — X X X X — — — — — — — — — — Reserved
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — UnswitchedPwrWarn
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — ConfigWarning
ProtectFltReset
This parameter resets a Protection Fault by setting the bit to 1.
0 = NoAction
0 > 1 = ResetFault
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
44
GET/SET
BOOL
Starter Protection
1
0
—
0
RunNetFltAction
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 46 (RunNetFltValue) defines how the starter will respond when a fault occurs.
0 = GoToFaultValue
1 = HoldLastState
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
45
GET/SET
BOOL
Starter Protection
1
0
—
0
114
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
RunNetFltValue
This parameter determines how the starter will be commanded in the event of a fault.
State the starter will go to on a NetFlt if
Parameter 45 (RunNetFltAction) = 1
(GotoFault-Value).
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
RunNetIdlAction
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 48 (RunNetIdlValue) defines how the starter will respond when a network is idle as determined by
Parameter 48.
0 = GoToIdleValue
1 = HoldLastState
RunNetIdlValue
This parameter determines the state that starter assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 47 (RunNetIdlAction) is set to 1.
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
User I/O Configuration Group
IOPointConfigure
This parameter determines the point that is configured:
0 = Input
1 = Output
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 4
46
GET/SET
BOOL
Starter Protection
1
0
—
0
47
GET/SET
BOOL
Starter Protection
1
0
—
0
48
GET
BOOL
Starter Protection
1
0
—
0
49
GET/SET
WORD
User I/O Config.
—
0
0x3F
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
115
Chapter 4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
—
—
X
5
—
—
—
4
—
—
—
—
X
—
FilterOffOn
This parameter determines the input
(which must be present for this time) before being reported ON.
X
—
—
3
—
—
—
Bit
—
—
—
2
—
—
X
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
—
—
—
1
—
X
—
FilterOnOff
This parameter determines the input
(which must be absent for this time) before being reported OFF.
OutProtFltState
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 53 (OutProtFltValue) defines how the starter outputs will respond when a fault occurs.
0 = GoToPrFltValue
1 = IgnorePrFlt
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
—
—
—
—
—
0
X
50
GET/SET
USINT
User I/O Config.
msecs
0
64
0
51
GET/SET
USINT
User I/O Config.
msecs
0
64
0
52
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
Function
Pt00
Pt01
Pt02
Pt03
Pt04
Pt05
116
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
OutProtFltValue
This parameter determines how the starter outputs will be commanded in the event of a protection fault if Parameter 52
(OutProtFltState) = 0.
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
OutNetFaultState
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 55 (OutNetFaultValue) defines how the starter outputs will respond on an
Ethernet fault.
0 = GoToFaultValue
1 = HoldLastState
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
OutNetFaultValue
This parameter determines the state of the starter outputs when an Ethernet fault occurs and Parameter 54
(OutNetFaultState) is set to 0.
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
OutNetIdleState
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 57 (OutNetIdleValue) defines how the starter outputs will respond when a network is idle.
0 = GoToIdleValue
1 = HoldLastState
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 4
55
GET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
56
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
53
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
54
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
117
Chapter 4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
118
Input00Function
This parameter determines the special function for User Input 0:
0 = NoFunction
1 = FaultReset
2 = MotionDisable
➊
3 = ForceSnapShot
4 = UserFault
5 = BrakeRelease
➊
➊
These choices are level sensitive. All others are edge sensitive
Input01Function
This parameter determines the special function for User Input 1:
0 = NoFunction
1 = FaultReset
2 = MotionDisable
➊
3 = ForceSnapShot
4 = UserFault
5 = BrakeRelease
➊
➊
These choices are level sensitive. All others are edge sensitive
Input02Function
This parameter determines the special function for User Input 2:
0 = NoFunction
1 = FaultReset
2 = MotionDisable
➊
3 = ForceSnapShot
4 = UserFault
5 = BrakeRelease
➊
➊
These choices are level sensitive. All others are edge sensitive
OutNetIdleValue
This parameter determines the state that starter outputs assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 56
(OutNetIdleState) is set to 0.
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
57
GET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
58
GET/SET
USINT
User I/O Config.
4
0
—
0
59
GET/SET
USINT
User I/O Config.
4
0
—
0
60
GET/SET
USINT
User I/O Config.
4
0
—
0
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 4
Input03Function
This parameter determines the special function for User Input 3:
0 = NoFunction
1 = FaultReset
2 = MotionDisable
➊
3 = ForceSnapShot
4 = UserFault
5 = BrakeRelease
➊
➊
These choices are level sensitive. All others are edge sensitive
Input04Function
This parameter determines the special function for User Input 4:
0 = NoFunction
1 = FaultReset
2 = MotionDisable
➊
3 = ForceSnapShot
4 = UserFault
5 = BrakeRelease
➊
➊
These choices are level sensitive. All others are edge sensitive
Input05Function
This parameter determines the special function for User Input 5:
0 = NoFunction
1 = FaultReset
2 = MotionDisable
➊
3 = ForceSnapShot
4 = UserFault
5 = BrakeRelease
➊
➊
These choices are level sensitive. All others are edge sensitive
Miscellaneous Configuration Group
NetworkOverride
This parameter allows for the local logic to override a Network fault.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
64
GET/SET
BOOL
Misc. Config.
1
0
—
0
119
61
GET/SET
USINT
User I/O Config.
4
0
—
0
62
GET/SET
USINT
User I/O Config.
4
0
—
0
63
GET/SET
USINT
User I/O Config.
4
0
—
0
Chapter 4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
CommsOverride
This parameter allows for local logic to override an I/O connection timeout.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
KeypadMode
This parameter selects if the keypad operation is maintained or momentary.
0 = Momentary
1 = Maintained
KeypadDisable
This parameter disables all keypad function except for the “OFF” and “RESET” buttons.
0 = KeypadEnabled
1 = KeypadDisabled
SetToDefaults
This parameter if set to “1” will set the device to the factory defaults.
0 = NoAction
1 = SetToDefaults
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
68
GET/SET
BOOL
Misc. Config.
1
0
—
0
67
GET/SET
BOOL
Misc. Config.
1
0
—
0
66
GET/SET
BOOL
Misc. Config.
1
0
—
0
65
GET/SET
BOOL
Misc. Config.
1
0
—
0
120
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 4
Advanced Configuration
OLWarningLevel
This parameter determines the Overload
Warning Level in % Thermal Capacity Used
(%TCU).
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
JamInhibitTime
This parameter determines the time during motor starting that Jam detection is inhibited.
JamTripDelay
This parameter determines how much time above the Jam Level before the unit will trip.
JamTripLevel
This parameter determines the Jam Trip
Level as a percentage of Full Load Amps.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
71
GET
USINT
Advanced Config.
x.x secs
1
25.0
5.0
72
GET
UINT
Advanced Config.
%FLA
50
600
250
69
GET
USINT
Advanced Config.
%TCU
0
100
85
70
GET
USINT
Advanced Config.
secs.
0
250
10
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
121
Chapter 4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
JamWarningLevel
This parameter determines the Jam
Warning Level as a percentage of Full Load Amps.
StallEnabledTime
This parameter determines the time that stall detection is enabled during motor starting.
StallTripLevel
This parameter determines the Stall Trip
Level as a percentage of Full Load Amps.
ULInhibitTime
This parameter determines the time during motor starting that Underload detection is inhibited.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
75
GET
UINT
Advanced Config.
%FLA
100
600
600
76
GET
USINT
Advanced Config.
secs
0
250
10
73
GET
UINT
Advanced Config.
%FLA
50
600
150
74
GET
USINT
Advanced Config.
secs
0
250
10
122
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 4
ULTripDelay
This parameter determines the time below
Underload Level before the unit will trip.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
ULTripLevel
This parameter determines the
Underload Trip Level as a percentage of Full Load Amps.
ULWarningLevel
This parameter determines the
Underload Warning Level as a percentage of Full Load Amps.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
77
GET
USINT
Advanced Config.
x.x secs
1
25.0
5.0
78
GET
USINT
Advanced Config.
%FLA
10
100
50
79
GET
USINT
Advanced Config.
%FLA
10
100
70
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
123
Chapter 4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Bulletin 294E Basic Status Group
OutputFreq
This parameter provides the output frequency at motor terminals T1, T2, T3.
CommandFreq
This parameter provides the commanded frequency even if the starter is not running.
OutputCurrent
This parameter provides the output current at motor terminals T1, T2, T3.
OutputVoltage
This parameter provides the output voltage at motor terminals T1, T2, T3.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
4
GET
UINT
Basic Status x.xV AC
0
999.9
0
3
GET
UINT
Basic Status x.xx Amps
0
8.00
0
2
GET
UINT
Basic Status x.x Hz
0
999.9
0
1
GET
UINT
Basic Status x.x Hz
0
999.9
0
124
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 4
DCBusVoltage
This parameter provides the present DC bus voltage level.
Starter Status
This parameter provides the status of the starter.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Function
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X TripPresent
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — WarningPresent
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — RunningForward
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — — RunningReverse
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — Ready
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — NetControlStatus
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — X — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — —
NetRefStatus
AtReference
DLXEnabled
KeyPadAuto
KeyPadOff
KeyPadHand
KeyPadJogging
Reserved
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — DisconnectClosed
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — BrakeStatus
6
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
OxDFFF
0
5
GET
UINT
Basic Status
V DC
0
1200
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
125
Chapter 4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
StarterCommand
The parameter provides the command status of the starter.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
7
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
0xFF1F
0
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Function
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X RunningForward
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X — RunningReverse
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — —
— — — — — — — — X X X — — — — —
ResetFault
JogForward
JogReverse
Reserved
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
Out00
Out01
Out02
Out03
Out04
Out05
Accel2
Decel2
AuxIOStatus
Status of the hardware input/output points.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
8
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
0x3F
0
126
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 4
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — —
X X X X X X X X X X — — — — — —
NetworkStatus
The parameter provides the status of the network connections.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
9
GET
WORD
Basic Status
—
0
0xDF
0
Function:
Pt00
Pt01
Pt02
Pt03
Pt04
Pt05
Reserved
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — — X
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — —
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — —
X X X X X X X X — — — — — — — —
Function:
ExplicitCnxn
IOConnection
ExplicitCnxnFlt
IOCnxnFault
IOCnxnIdle
Reserve
DLREnabled
DLRFlt
Reserved
DLXControlStatus
The parameter provides the DeviceLogix
Control Status.
0 = Controlled in Logix Programs
1 = Controlled in local DLX programs.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
10
GET
UINT
Basic Status
—
0
0x1FFF
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
127
Chapter 4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
0
X
X —
— —
— — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — X
— — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — X
— — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
—
X
X —
—
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— — — — — —
— — — — — X
— — — —
— — — X
X X X
X
—
—
—
X
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
— — — — — — — — — — — — —
OutputSourceV (IPS)
[SwitchedVolts]
This parameter determines the incoming switched control voltage across terminals
A1…A2.
(IPS) available voltage on User Output Pin
4 for all I/O points.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
SensorSourceV (IPS)
[UnswitchedVolts]
This parameter determines the incoming unswitched control voltage across terminals A2…A3.
(IPS) available voltage on input Sensor
Source Pin 1 for all I/O points.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
12
GET
UINT
Basic Status x.xx Volts
0
65535
0
11
GET
UINT
Basic Status x.xx Volts
0
65535
0
Function:
RunForward
RunReverse
Out00
Out01
Out02
Out03
Out04
Out05
JogForward
JogReverse
Accel2
Decel2
Command Freq
Reserved
128
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
InternalFanRPM
This parameter determines the
Revolutions Per Minute (RPM) of the internal cooling fan.
DriveTemperature
This parameter determines the present operating temperature of the power section.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
ElapsedRunTime
This parameter determines the accumulated run time displayed in 10 hour increments.
1 = 10 Hrs
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Trip Status Group
TripStatus
This parameter provides the fault condition that caused any current trip.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 4
14
GET
UINT
Basic Status
—
0
9999
0
13
GET
UINT
Basic Status
RPM
0
65535
0
15
GET
UINT
Basic Status
°C
0
9999
0
16
GET
WORD
Trip Status
—
0
0xFFFF
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
129
Chapter 4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
130
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — X
X
X
—
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — —
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
Function
OverloadTrip
PhaseShortTrip
UnderPowerTrip
SensorShortTrip
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — OverCurrentTrip
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — NonVolMemoryTrip
ParamSyncTrip
DCBusTrip/
OpenDisconnect
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — —
StallTrip
OverTemperature
GroundFault
RestartRetries
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — — DriveHdwFault
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — — OutputShortTrip
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — UserDefinedTrip
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — HardwareFltTrip
WarningStatus
This parameter provides the current warning condition.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
17
GET
WORD
Trip Status
—
0
0xC044
0
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Function
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X X Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — UnderPowerWarn
— — — — — — — — — — X X X — — —
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — —
Reserved
DriveParamInit
— — X X X X X X X — — — — — — — Reserved
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — UnswitchedPwrWarn
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — ConfigWarning
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 4
TripLog0
This parameter provides the last trip to occur.
TripLog1
This parameter provides the second last trip to occur.
TripLog2
This parameter provides the third last trip to occur.
TripLog3
This parameter provides the fourth last trip to occur.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
21
GET
UINT
Trip Status
—
0
75
0
20
GET
UINT
Trip Status
—
0
75
0
19
GET
UINT
Trip Status
—
0
75
0
18
GET
UINT
Trip Status
—
0
75
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
131
Chapter 4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
TripLog4
This parameter provides the fifth last trip to occur.
SnapShotOutFreq
This parameter provides a snapshot of output frequency at time of last trip.
SnapShotOutAmps
This parameter provides a snapshot of output current at time of last trip.
SnapShotOutVolts
This parameter provides a snapshot of output voltage at time of last trip.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
25
GET
UINT
Trip Status x.x V AC
0
999.9
0
24
GET
UINT
Trip Status x.xx Amps
0
4.60
0
23
GET
UINT
Trip Status x.x Hz
0
999.9
0
22
GET
UINT
Trip Status
—
0
75
0
132
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
SnapShotBusVolts
This parameter provides a snapshot of DC bus voltage level at time of last trip.
SnapShotDrvTemp
This parameter provides a snapshot of operating temperature at time of last trip.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Motor and Control Group
MotorNPVolts
O
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Set to the motor nameplate rated voltage.
MotorNPHertz
O
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Set to the motor nameplate rated frequency.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 4
27
GET
UINT
Trip Status
°C
0
9999
0
26
GET
UINT
Trip Status
V DC
0
1200
0
28
GET/SET
UINT
Motor and Control
V AC
35
460
460
29
GET/SET
UINT
Motor and Control
Hz
10
400
60
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
133
Chapter 4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
StopMode
MotorOLCurrent
Set to the maximum allowable motor current.
Cat. No.
294_FD1P5
294_FD2P5
294_FD4P2
Hp (kW)
0.5 (0.4)
1.0 (0.75)
2.0 (1.5)
Min Amps
0
0
0
CurrentLimit
Maximum output current allowed before current limiting occurs
Default Amps
1.5
2.5
3.6
Cat. No.
294_FD1P5
294_FD2P5
294_FD4P2
Hp (kW)
0.5 Hp
1.0 Hp
2.0 Hp
Min = 0; Max = 2.7; Default = 2.2
Min = 0; Max = 4.5; Default = 3.7
Min = 0; Max = 7.5; Default = 6.3
Valid Stop Mode for the Bulletin 294E ArmorStart LT are the following:
0 =
RampToStop,
“Stop” command clears active fault
1 =
Coast to Stop,
“Stop” command clears active fault
2 =
DCBrake,
DC Injection Braking Stop, “Stop” command clears active fault
3 =
DCBrakeAuto,
DC Injection Stop with Auto Shutoff
Standard DC Injection Braking for value set in Parameter 75 (DC Brake Time) or
Drive shuts off if current limit is exceeded.
Parameter Number
Related Parameter
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
30
31, 80, 82…83
GET/SET
UINT
Motor and Control x.x Amps
0
Cat. No. Dependent
Cat. No. Max Output
31
GET/SET
UINT
Motor and Control x.x Amps
0
Cat. No. Dependent
Cat. No. Dependent
32
GET/SET
UINT
Motor and Control
—
0
3
0
134
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 4
Speed Control Group
SpeedReference
Sets the source of the speed reference:
0 = Logix (Network or DeviceLogix)
1 = InternalFreq
MinimumFreq
Sets the lowest frequency the drive will output continuously.
MaximumFreq
O
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Sets the highest frequency the drive will output.
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameter
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameter
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
34
1, 2, 35
GET/SET
UINT
Speed Control x.x Hz
0.0
400.0
0.0
33
1, 2, 36, 37, 72
GET/SET
UINT
Speed Control
—
0
2
0
35
1, 2, 34, 35, 139
GET/SET
UINT
Speed Control
Hz
0.0
400
60
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
135
Chapter 4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
AccelTime1
Sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases.
Maximum Freq
Accel Time
= Accel Rate
Parameter 35
(Maximum Freq)
Dec eler ation
Speed
Acc eler ation
0
0
Accel
Time 1
Time Decel
Time 1
DecelTime1
Sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases.
Maximum Freq
Decel Time
= Decel Rate
Parameter 35
(Maximum Freq)
Dec eler ation
Speed
Acc eler ation
0
0
Accel
Time 1
Time Decel
Time 1
SCurvePercent
Sets the percentage of acceleration or deceleration time that is applied to ramp as S Curve. Time is added, half at the beginning and half at the end of the ramp.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
37
33, 36
GET/SET
UINT
Speed Control x.x secs
0.1
600.0
10.0
36
33, 37
GET/SET
UINT
Speed Control x.x secs
0.0
600.0
10.0
38
GET/SET
UINT
Speed Control
Percentage
0
100
0
136
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 4
Figure 53 - S Curve
Example:
Accel Time = 10 Seconds
S Curve Setting = 50%
S Curve Time = 10 x 0.5 = 5 Seconds
Total Time = 10 + 5 = 15 Seconds
Target
Target 2
50% S Curve
JogFrequency
Sets the output frequency when the jog command is issued.
JogAccelDecel
Sets the acceleration and deceleration time when a jog command is issued.
1/2 S Curve Time
2.5 Seconds
Accel Time
10 Seconds
Total Time to Accelerate = Accel Time + S Curve Time
1/2 S Curve Time
2.5 Seconds
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
39
35, 40
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup x.x Hz
0.0
400.0
10.0
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
40
39
GET/SET
UINT
Drive Advanced Setup x.x secs
0.1
600.0
10.0
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
137
Chapter 4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
138
Starter Protection Group
ProtFltResetMode
This parameter configures the Protection
Fault reset mode.
0 = Manual
1 = Automatic
ProtectFltEnable
This parameter enables the Protection
Fault by setting the bit to 1.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — X
X
X
—
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — —
— — — — — — — — — — — — X — — —
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — —
— — — — — — —
Function
OverloadTrip
PhaseShortTrip
UnderPowerTrip
SensorShortTrip
— — — — — — — — — — — X — — — — OverCurrentTrip
— — — — — — — — — — X — — — — — NonVolMemoryTrip
ParamSyncTrip
DCBusTrip/
OpenDisconnect
— — — — — — — X — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — X — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — X — — — — — — — — — —
— — — — X — — — — — — — — — — —
StallTrip
OverTemperature
GroundFault
RestartRetries
— — — X — — — — — — — — — — — — DriveHdwFault
— — X — — — — — — — — — — — — — OutputShortTrip
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — UserDefinedTrip
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — HardwareFltTrip
The functions highlighted are enabled by default
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
41
GET/SET
BOOL
Starter Protection
1
0
—
0
42
GET/SET
WORD
Starter Protection
—
0
0xFFFF
0xBFFF
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 4
WarningEnable
This parameter enables a warning by setting the bit to 1.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
43
GET/SET
WORD
Starter Protection
—
0
0xC044
0
Bit
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Function
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — X X Reserved
— — — — — — — — — — — — — X — — UnderPowerWarn
— — — — — — — — — — X X X — — —
— — — — — — — — — X — — — — — —
Reserved
DriveParamInit
— — X X X X X X X — — — — — — — Reserved
— X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — UnswitchedPwrWarn
X — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — ConfigWarning
ProtectFltReset
This parameter resets a Protection Fault by setting the bit to 1.
0 = NoAction
0 > 1 = ResetFault
RunNetFltAction
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 46 (RunNetFltValue) defines how the starter will respond when a network fault occurs as determined.
0 = GoToFaultValue
1 = HoldLastState
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
44
GET/SET
BOOL
Starter Protection
1
0
—
0
45
GET/SET
BOOL
Starter Protection
1
0
—
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
139
Chapter 4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
RunNetFltValue
This parameter determines how the starter will be commanded in the event of a fault.
State the starter will go to on a NetFlt if
Parameter 45 (RunNetFltAction) = 1
(GotoFault-Value).
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
RunNetIdlAction
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 48 (RunNetIdlValue) defines how the starter will respond when a network is idle as determined by Parameter 48.
0 = GoToIdleValue
1 = HoldLastState
RunNetIdlValue
This parameter determines the state that starter assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 47 (RunNetIdlAction) is set to 1.
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
User I/O Configuration Group
IOPointConfigure
This parameter determines the point that is configured:
0 = Input
1 = Output
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
140
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
46
GET/SET
BOOL
Starter Protection
1
0
—
0
47
GET/SET
BOOL
Starter Protection
1
0
—
0
48
GET
BOOL
Starter Protection
—
0
0x3F
0
49
GET/SET
WORD
User I/O Config.
—
0
0x3F
0
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 4
—
—
X
5
—
—
—
4
—
—
—
—
X
—
FilterOffOn
This parameter determines the input
(which must be present for this time) before being reported ON.
X
—
—
3
—
—
—
Bit
—
—
—
2
—
—
X
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
—
—
—
1
—
X
—
FilterOnOff
This parameter determines the input
(which must be absent for this time) before being reported OFF.
OutProtFltState
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 53 (OutProtFltValue) defines how the starter outputs will respond when a fault occurs.
0 = GoToPrFltValue
1 = IgnorePrFlt
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
—
—
—
—
—
0
X
50
GET/SET
USINT
User I/O Config.
msecs
0
64
0
51
GET/SET
USINT
User I/O Config.
msecs
0
64
0
52
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
Function
Pt00
Pt01
Pt02
Pt03
Pt04
Pt05
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
141
Chapter 4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
OutProtFltValue
This parameter determines how the starter outputs will be commanded in the event of a protection fault if Parameter 52
(OutProtFltState) = 0.
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
OutNetFaultState
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 55 (OutNetFaultValue) defines how the starter outputs will respond on an Ethernet fault.
0 = GoToFaultValue
1 = HoldLastState
OutNetFaultValue
This parameter determines the state that starter outputs when an Ethernet fault occurs and Parameter 54
(OutNetFaultState) is set to 0.
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
OutNetIdleState
This parameter in conjunction with
Parameter 57 (OutNetIdleValue) defines how the starter outputs will respond when a network is idle.
0 = GoToIdleValue
1 = HoldLastState
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
55
GET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
56
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
53
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
54
GET/SET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
142
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Input00Function
This parameter determines the special function for User Input 0:
0 = NoFunction
1 = FaultReset
2 = MotionDisable
➊
3 = ForceSnapShot
4 = UserFault
5 = BrakeRelease
➊
➊
These choices are level sensitive.
All others are edge sensitive
Input01Function
This parameter determines the special function for User Input 1:
0 = NoFunction
1 = FaultReset
2 = MotionDisable
➊
3 = ForceSnapShot
4 = UserFault
5 = BrakeRelease
➊
➊
These choices are level sensitive. All others are edge sensitive
Input02Function
This parameter determines the special function for User Input 2:
0 = NoFunction
1 = FaultReset
2 = MotionDisable
➊
3 = ForceSnapShot
4 = UserFault
5 = BrakeRelease
➊
➊
These choices are level sensitive. All others are edge sensitive
OutNetIdleValue
This parameter determines the state that starter outputs assumes when the network is idle and Parameter 56
(OutNetIdleState) is set to 0.
0 = OFF
1 = ON
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 4
57
GET
BOOL
User I/O Config.
1
0
—
0
58
GET/SET
USINT
User I/O Config.
5
0
—
0
59
GET/SET
USINT
User I/O Config.
5
0
—
0
60
GET/SET
USINT
User I/O Config.
5
0
—
0
143
Chapter 4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Input03Function
This parameter determines the special function for User Input 3:
0 = NoFunction
1 = FaultReset
2 = MotionDisable
➊
3 = ForceSnapShot
4 = UserFault
5 = BrakeRelease*
➊
➊
These choices are level sensitive. All others are edge sensitive
Input04Function
This parameter determines the special function for User Input 4:
0 = NoFunction
1 = FaultReset
2 = MotionDisable
➊
3 = ForceSnapShot
4 = UserFault
5 = BrakeRelease
➊
➊
These choices are level sensitive. All others are edge sensitive
Input05Function
This parameter determines the special function for User Input 5:
0 = NoFunction
1 = FaultReset
2 = MotionDisable
➊
3 = ForceSnapShot
4 = UserFault
5 = BrakeRelease
➊
➊
These choices are level sensitive. All others are edge sensitive
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
61
GET/SET
USINT
User I/O Config.
5
0
—
0
62
GET/SET
USINT
User I/O Config.
5
0
—
0
63
GET/SET
USINT
User I/O Config.
5
0
—
0
144
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 4
Miscellaneous Configuration Group
NetworkOverride
This parameter allows for the local logic to override a Network fault.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
CommsOverride
This parameter allows for local logic to override an I/O connection timeout.
0 = Disable
1 = Enable
KeypadMode
This parameter selects if the keypad operation is maintained or momentary.
0 = Momentary
1 = Maintained
KeypadDisable
This parameter disables all keypad function except for the “OFF” and “RESET” buttons.
0 = KeypadEnabled
1 = KeypadDisabled
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
67
GET/SET
BOOL
Misc. Config.
1
0
—
0
66
GET/SET
BOOL
Misc. Config.
1
0
—
0
65
GET/SET
BOOL
Misc. Config.
1
0
—
0
64
GET/SET
BOOL
Misc. Config.
1
0
—
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
145
Chapter 4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
SetToDefaults
This parameter if set to “1” will set the device to the factory defaults.
0 = NoAction
1 = SetToDefaults
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Advanced Configuration
AccelTime2
When active, sets the rate of acceleration for all speed increases except for jog.
Maximum Freq
Accel Time
= Accel Rate
Parameter 35
(Maximum Freq)
Speed
Acc eler ation
0
0
Accel
Time 2
Time
Dec eler ation
Decel
Time 2
DecelTime2
When active, sets the rate of deceleration for all speed decreases except for jog.
Maximum Freq
Decel Time
= Decel Rate
Parameter 35
(Maximum Freq)
Speed
Acc eler ation
0
0
Accel
Time 2
Time
Dec eler ation
Decel
Time 2
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
68
GET/SET
BOOL
Misc. Config.
1
0
—
0
69
36
GET/SET
UINT
Advanced Config.
x.x secs
0.0
600.0
20.0
70
37
GET/SET
UINT
Advanced Config.
x.x secs
0.0
600.0
20.0
146
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
MotorOLRetention
Enables/disables the Motor overload
Retention function. When Enabled, the value held in the motor overload counter is saved at power-down and restored at power-up. A change to this parameter setting resets the counter.
0 = Disabled (Default)
1 = Enabled
InternalFreq
Provide the frequency command to drive when Parameter 33 (Speed-Reference) =
1 (InternalFreq). When enabled, this parameter will change the frequency command in real time.
SkipFrequency
Sets the frequency at which the drive will not operate.
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
SkipFrqBand
Determines the band width around
Parameter 73 (SkipFrequency). Parameter
74 (SkipFreqBand) is split applying 1/2 above and 1/2 below the actual skip frequency. A setting of 0.0 disables this parameter.
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 4
71
GET/SET
UINT
Advanced Config.
1
0
—
0
72
33
GET/SET
UINT
Advanced Config.
x.x Hz
0.0
400.0
60.0
73
74
GET/SET
UINT
Advanced Config.
Hz
0
400 Hz
0 Hz
74
73
GET/SET
UINT
Advanced Config.
x.x Hz
0.0 Hz
30.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
147
Chapter 4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Figure 54 - Skip Frequency Band
Frequency
Command
Frequency
Drive Output
Frequency
Skip Frequency
2x Skip
Frequency Band
DCBrakeTime
Sets the length of time that DC brake current is injected into the motor. Refer to Parameter 76
(DCBrakeLevel).
Time
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
75
32, 76
GET/SET
UINT
Advanced Config.
x.x secs
0.0
99.9
(Setting of 99.9 = Continuous)
0.0
DCBrakeLevel
Defines the maximum DC brake current, in amps, applied to the motor when Parameter 32
(StopMode) is set to either
0 = RAMP or 2 = DC BRAKE.
For 0.5 Hp units – Min = 0; Max = 2.7; Default = .1
For 1.0 Hp units – Min = 0; Max = 4.5; Default = .1
For 2.0Hp units – Min = 0; Max = 7.5; Default = .2
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
76
32, 75
GET/SET
UINT
Advanced Config.
x.x Amps
0.0
Hp Dependant
Hp Dependant
148
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 4
ATTENTION:
Ramp-to-Stop Mode
Voltage
DC Injection Braking Mode
Stop Command
Speed
Voltage
Time
[DC Brake Time]
}
[DC Brake Level]
Speed
[DC Brake Time]
}
[DC Brake Level]
Stop Command
Time
•
If a hazard of injury due to movement of equipment or material exists, an auxiliary mechanical braking device must be used.
•
This feature should not be used with synchronous or permanent magnet motors. Motors may be demagnetized during braking.
ReverseDisable
O
Stop drive before changing this parameter.
Enables/disables the function that allows the direction of the motor rotation to be changed.
0 = Enabled
1 = Disabled
FlyingStartEn
Sets the condition that allows the drive to reconnect to a spinning motor at actual RPM.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
77
—
GET/SET
UINT
Advanced Config.
—
0
1
0
78
GET/SET
UINT
Advanced Config.
1
0
—
0
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
149
Chapter 4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Compensation
Enables/disables correction options that may improve problems with motor instability,
0 = Disabled
1 = Electrical (Default)
Some drive/motor combinations have inherent instabilities which are exhibited as non-sinusoidal motor currents. This setting attempts to correct this condition
2 = Mechanical
Some motor/load combinations have mechanical resonances which can be excited by the drive current regulator. This setting slows down the current regulator response and attempts to correct this condition.
3 = Both
Parameter Number
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
SlipHertzAtFLA
Compensates for the inherent slip in an induction motor. This frequency is added to the commanded output frequency based on motor current.
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
BusRegulateMode
Controls the operation of the drive voltage regulation, which is normally operational at deceleration or when the bus voltage rises.
0 = Disable
1 = Enabled
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
80
30
GET/SET
UINT
Advanced Config.
x.x Hz
0.0 Hz
10.0 Hz
2.0 Hz
81
—
GET/SET
UINT
Advanced Config.
—
0
1
0
79
GET/SET
UINT
Advanced Config.
—
0
3
1
150
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 4
ATTENTION:
The bus regulator mode function is extremely useful for preventing nuisance overvoltage faults resulting from aggressive decelerations, overhauling loads, and eccentric loads. However, it can also cause either of the following two conditions to occur.
1. Fast positive changes in input voltage or imbalanced input voltages can cause uncommanded positive speed changes;
2. Actual deceleration times can be longer than commanded deceleration times.
However, a "Stall Fault" is generated if the drive remains in this state for 1 minute.
If this condition is unacceptable, the bus regulator must be disabled.
MotorOLSelect
Drive provides Class 10 motor overload protection. Sets the derating factor for I
2 motor overload function.
T
0 = NoDerating
1 = MinDerating
2 = MaxDerating
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
82
29, 30
GET/SET
UINT
Advanced Config.
—
0
2
0
Figure 55 - Overload Trip Curves
No Derate
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175
% of Motor Nameplate Hertz (P29)
200
Min. Derate
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175
% of Motor Nameplate Hertz (P29)
200
SWCurrentTrip
Enables/disables a software instantaneous
(within 100 ms) current trip.
For 0.5 Hp units – Min = 0; Max = 3.0; Default = 0
For 1.0 Hp units – Min = 0; Max = 5.0; Default = 0
For 2.0Hp units – Min = 0; Max = 8.4; Default = 0
Parameter Number
Related Parameter
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Max. Derate
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175
% of Motor Nameplate Hertz (P29)
200
83
30
GET/SET
UINT
Advanced Config.
x.x Amps
0.0
Hp Dependent
0.0 (Disabled)
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
151
Chapter 4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
AutoRstrtTries
Set the maximum number of times the drive attempts to reset a fault and restart.
Parameter Number
Related Parameter
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Clear a Type 1 Fault and Restart the Drive
1.
Set Parameter 84 (AutoRestartTries) to a value other than 0.
2.
Set Parameter 85 (AutoRestartDelay) to a value other than 0.
84
85
GET/SET
UINT
Advanced Config.
—
0
9
0
Clear an Overvoltage, Undervoltage, or Heatsink OvrTmp Fault without Restarting the Drive
1.
Set Parameter 84 (AutoRestartTries) to a value other than 0.
2.
Set Parameter 85 (AutoRestartDelay) to 0.
ATTENTION:
Equipment damage and/or personal injury may result if this parameter is used in an inappropriate application. Do not use this function without considering applicable local, national, and international codes, standards, regulations, or industry guidelines.
152
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 4
AutoRstrtDelay
Sets time between restart attempts when
Parameter 84(Auto Rstrt Tries) is set to a value other than zero.
Parameter Number
Related Parameter
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
85
84
GET/SET
UINT
Advanced Config.
x.x secs
0.0
120.0
1.0
BoostSelect
Sets the boost voltage (% of Parameter 28
[MotorNPVolts]) and redefines the Volts per Hz curve.
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
86
28, 29
GET/SET
UINT
Advanced Config.
—
1
14
8
11
12
9
10
13
14
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
2
Table 24 - Boost Select Options
Options
Custom V/Hz
30.0, VT
35.0, VT
40.0, VT
45.0, VT
0.0 no IR
0.0
2.5, CT
5.0, CT (default)
7.5, CT
10.0, CT
12.5, CT
15.0, CT
17.5, CT
20.0, CT
Description
Variable Torque
(Typical fan/pump curves)
Constant Torque
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
153
Chapter 4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Figure 56 - Boost Select
100
50
1/2 [Motor NP Volts]
Settings
5-14
0 50
%P29 [Motor NP Hertz]
MaximumVoltage
Sets the highest voltage the drive will output.
1
2
3
4
100
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
MotorNamePlateFLA
Set to the motor nameplate Full Load Amps.
For 0.5 Hp units – Min = 0; Max = 3.0; Default = 1.5
For 1.0 Hp units – Min = 0; Max = 5.0; Default = 2.5
For 2.0Hp units – Min = 0; Max = 8.4; Default = 3.6
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
87
—
GET/SET
UINT
Advanced Config.
V AC
20V AC
460V AC
2V AC
88
—
GET/SET
UINT
Advanced Config.
x.x Amps
0.0
Hp Dependent
Hp Dependent
154
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Chapter 4
BrakeMode
This parameter determines the source brake control mode.
0 = NoBrakeControl
1 = AboveFrequency
2 = AboveCurrent
BrakeFreqThresh
This parameter determines the frequency above which the source brake is released.
BrakeCurrThresh
This parameter determines the motor current above which the source brake is released.
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Parameter Number
Related Parameters
Access Rule
Data Type
Group
Units
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
89
—
GET/SET
UINT
Advanced Config.
—
0
2
1
90
—
GET/SET
UINT
Advanced Config.
x.x Hz
0.0
999.9
0.0
91
—
GET/SET
UINT
Advanced Config.
x.xx Amps
0.0
8.0
0.0
IMPORTANT
For parameter 90 and 91 the value of the threshold can be set beyond the operational maximum limit of the product, or at a level which may cause multiple transitions during operation. Threshold values near the operational levels should be avoided.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
155
Chapter 4
Bulletin 290E/291E/294E Programmable Parameters
Notes:
156
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Chapter
5
Diagnostics
Overview
Status LEDs and Reset
This chapter describes the fault diagnostics of the ArmorStart LT Distributed
Motor Controller and the conditions that cause various faults to occur.
Figure 57 - Status and Diagnostic LEDs and Reset
ArmorStart LT provides comprehensive status and diagnostics via 12 individually
marked LEDs shown in Figure 57
, located on the ECM module. In addition, a local reset is provide for clearing of faults. Table 25 details the diagnostic and status LEDs.
Table 25 - ArmorStart LT Status and Diagnostics Indicators
Indicator
PWR LED
RUN/FLT LED
LS1 and LS2 – Link
Status LEDs
Description
The bicolor (green/yellow) LED shows the state of the control voltage. When LED is off, switched and/or unswitched power is not present.
The bicolor (green/red) LED combines the functions of the Run and Fault LEDs.
NS – Network Status
LED
The bicolor (green/red) LED indicates the status of the CIP network connection. See
Network Status Indicator for further information.
Flashing bicolor (red/green) indicates a self-test on power up.
The bicolor (green/yellow) LED shows the activity/link status of each EtherNet/IP port.
Color_1
Solid green is illuminated when switched and unswitched control power is within its specified limits and has the proper polarity.
Solid green is illuminated when a Run command is present.
Color_2
Solid yellow is illuminated when switched or unswitched control power is outside its specified limits or has incorrect polarity.
Flashing yellow indicates line voltage is not present (Bulletin 294 units only).
The LED will blink red in a prescribed fault pattern when a protection fault (trip) condition is present. See table for fault blink patterns.
Flashing red indicates the connection has timed out. Steady Red indicates a duplicate
IP Address detected.
Flashing green indicates an IP address is configured, no CIP connections are established, and an Exclusive Owner connection has not timed out.
Steady green indicates at least one CIP connection is established and an Exclusive
Owner connection has not timed out.
Solid green is illuminated when a link has been established at 100 Mbps.
Solid yellow is illuminated when a link has been established at 10 Mbps.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
157
Chapter 5
Diagnostics
I/O Status
Enunciators 0…5
LEDs
Reset Button
Table 25 - ArmorStart LT Status and Diagnostics Indicators
Indicator
MS – Module Status
LED
Description
The bicolor (green/red) LED indicates the status of the module.
Flashing bicolor (red/green) indicates a self-test on power up.
Six yellow LEDs are numbered 0…5 and indicate the status of the input/output connectors. One LED for each I/O point.
The blue reset button will cause a protection fault reset to occur.
Color_1
Flashing green indicates the device has not been assigned an IP address.
Steady green indicates the device is configured and operational.
Color_2
Flashing red indicates a resettable protection fault exists or the node address switches have been changed without a power cycle and do not match the in-use configuration.
Steady red indicates a non-resettable protection fault exists.
Yellow is illuminated when input is valid or output is on.
Off when input is not valid or the output is not turned on.
— —
Fault Diagnostics
Fault diagnostics capabilities built in the ArmorStart LT Distributed Motor
Controller are designed to help you pinpoint a problem for easy troubleshooting and quick restarting.
Protection Faults
Protection faults will be generated when potentially dangerous or damaging conditions are detected. Protection faults are also known as “trips” or “faults”.
These faults will be reported in multiple formats, including:
•
Bit enumeration in the TripStatus parameter (parameter 16) used as discrete bits or in DeviceLogix
•
In the ArmorStart LT web server for ArmorStart EtherNet/IP version
•
As a sequence of LED flashes on the ECM
LED Flash Bit Enumeration Bulletin 290E/291E Trip Status Bits Bulletin 294E Trip Status Bits
1 0 OverloadTrip
➊
OverloadTrip
➊
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
PhaseLossTrip
UnderPowerTrip
SensorShortTrip
PhaseImbalTrip
JamTrip
StallTrip
UnderloadTrip reserved
➊
NonVolMemoryTrip
➊ reserved
➊
PhaseLShortTrip
UnderPowerTrip
➊
SensorShortTrip
➊
OverCurrentTrip
NonVolMemoryTrip
➊
ParamSyncTrip
➊
DCBusOrOpenDiscnnct
➊
StallTrip
➊
OverTemperature
➊
GroundFault
➊
12
13
11
12 reserved reserved
RestartRetries
DriveHdwFault
➊
158
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Diagnostics
Chapter 5
LED Flash Bit Enumeration Bulletin 290E/291E Trip Status Bits Bulletin 294E Trip Status Bits
14 13 OutputShortTrip
➊
OutputShortTrip
➊
15
16
14
15
UserDefinedTrip
HardwareFltTrip
➊
UserDefinedTrip
HardwareFltTrip
➊
➊
Can not be disabled.
A “ProtectFltEnable” parameter (param 42) is used to enable and disable individual protection faults. This parameter will be a bit enumerated parameter with each “disable fault” bit enumerated. Not all Faults can be disabled. Setting a bit to the value “1” enables the corresponding protection fault. Clearing a bit disables the protection fault. For protection faults that can not be disabled the value is always “1”.
There are two Protection Fault Reset modes:
manual and automatic. When parameter 41 “ProtFltResetMode” is set to the value 0=Manual mode, a manual fault reset must occur before the fault is reset. When manual reset mode faults are latched until a fault reset command has been detected either locally or remotely.
A Manual reset operation is either remotely via the network, locally via the
“Reset” button on the front keypad, or via a DeviceLogix program. A rising edge
(0 to 1 transition) of the “ResetFault” tag will attempt a reset. A rising edge of the parameter 44 “ProtectFltReset” will attempt a reset. A press of the local blue
“Reset” button on the front keypad will attempt a reset. A rising edge of the
“ResetFault” DeviceLogix tag will attempt a reset. When “ProtFltResetMode” is set to the value 1=Automatic, “auto-reset” faults are cleared automatically when the fault condition goes away.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
159
Chapter 5
Diagnostics
Quick Reference
Troubleshooting
The LEDs on the front of the ArmorStart LT provide an indication as to the health of the device and network. The following is a brief troubleshooting guide.
Table 26 - LED Status Indication
Status LED
PWR (Control) Status Indicator
Off
Green
The PWR LED is not illuminated at all.
Voltage is present.
Description Recommended Action
Verify power is connected and with proper polarity.
No action
Verify that the control power is between 19.2 and 26V DC. Flashing Yellow
RUN/FLT Status Indicator
Power has fallen below minimum acceptable level.
Off The RUN/FLT LED is not illuminated when a Run command has been issued.
Verify that PLC is in Run mode. Verify that the correct run bit is being controlled. Verify that a stop condition does not exist.
Green
Flashing Red
Valid start command
Protection fault
MS – Module Status Indicator
Off The MS LED is not illuminated.
No action
Count flashes and refer to Table 27 and 28.
Steady Green
Flashing Green
Flashing Red
Device configured and operational
Device IP Address has not been configured. .
Resettable protection fault exists.
Check to make sure the product is properly wired and configured on the network.
No action
Configure IP Address
Solid Red Non-resettable protection fault exists.
Verify fault by reviewing [TripStatus] Parameter 16 and
[TripLog0…4] Parameters 18…22. Correct and press the blue reset button.
Verify fault by reviewing [TripStatus] Parameter 16 and
[TripLog0…4] Parameters 18…22. Correct and cycle control power (switched and unswitched).
No action Flashes Green-Red Self-test on power up
NS – Network Status Indicator
Off The NS LED is not illuminated.
Steady Green
Flashing Green
Flashing Red
Solid Red
Flashes
Green-Red
Check to make sure the product is properly wired and configured on the network.
No action CIP connection is established.
An IP address is configured, but no CIP connections are established, and an Exclusive Owner connection has not timed out.
Connection has timed out.
Check to make sure the product is properly wired and configured on the network.
Check to make sure the PLC is operating correctly and that there are no media/cabling issues. Check to see if other network devices are in a similar state.
Check for node address conflict and resolve.
Duplicate IP address detected
The device has not completed the initialization, is not on an active network, or has not finished self test at power up.
Remove or change the IP address of the conflicting device.
LS1 and LS2 Port Activity/Status
Off No link established.
Green
Flashing Green
Yellow
Link established at 100 Mbps.
Transmit or receive activity present at 100 Mbps.
Link established at 10 Mbps.
Verify network connection.
No action
No action
No action
160
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Diagnostics
Chapter 5
Flashing Yellow
I/O Status Indicators
Off
Status LED
Table 26 - LED Status Indication
Description
Transmit or receive activity present at 10 Mbps.
The user has plugged into the I/O, but the indicator did not illuminate, once initiated.
No action
Recommended Action
Verify the wiring of Input or Output is correct. When used as an output point, ensure the corresponding bit in parameter 49 [IOPointConfiguration] is set to Output.
Fault LED Indications
The RUN/FLT LED will blink red in a prescribed fault pattern when a protection fault (trip) condition is present. The LED will blink in 0.5 second intervals when indicating a fault code. Once the pattern is finished, there will be a
2 second pause after which the pattern will be repeated.
Bulletin 290E/291E Faults
Bulletin 290E/291E faults are detected by the main control board. When the
[ProtFltResetMode] Parameter 41 is set to the value 1=Automatic, the auto resettable faults in the table will reset automatically when the fault condition is no longer present.
Table 27 - Fault LED Indicator for Bulletin 290E/291E
Blink
Pattern Auto-Reset Disable Default
1 Yes No On
2
3
4
5
6
7
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
No
—
Yes
No
No
Yes
No
—
Off
On
On
Off
On
—
Bulletin 290E/291E
Trip Status
Overload Trip
Description
The load has drawn excessive current and based on the trip class selected, the device has tripped.
Phase Loss Trip The ArmorStart LT has detected a missing phase.
Action
Verify that the load is operating correctly and is properly set-up, [FLASetting] Parameter 28,
[OLResetLevel] Parameter 29. The fault may be reset only after the motor has sufficiently cooled.
This fault is generated by monitoring the relative levels of the 3-phase currents. Correct phase imbalance or disable fault using [ProtectFltEnable]
Parameter 42.
Check control voltage, wiring, and proper polarity (A1/
A2/A3 terminal).
Under Power Trip
Sensor Short Trip
The ArmorStart LT detected switched or unswitched power dip below 19.2 V for greater than 50 ms, or 13 V for greater than 4 ms.
This error indicates a shorted sensor, shorted input device, wiring input mistakes.
Phase Imbalance Trip The ArmorStart LT has detected a current imbalance in one of the phases.
Correct, isolated or remove wiring error prior to restarting the system.
Non-Volatile Memory
Trip
Reserved
This is a major fault, which renders the
ArmorStart LT inoperable. Possible causes of this fault are transients induced during
Non-Volatile Storage (NVS) routines.
—
Check the power system for current imbalance and correct. Correct phase imbalance or disable fault using
[ProtectFltEnable] Parameter 42.
1. If the fault was initiated by a transient, power cycling may clear the problem.
2. This fault may be reset by a [SetToDefaults]
Parameter 68.
3. Replacement of the ArmorStart LT may be required.
—
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
161
Chapter 5
Diagnostics
Table 27 - Fault LED Indicator for Bulletin 290E/291E
Blink
Pattern Auto-Reset Disable Default
8 No Yes Off
9
10
13
14
11
12
15
16
No
No
—
—
—
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
—
—
—
No
Yes
No
Off
Off
—
—
—
On
Off
On
Bulletin 290E/291E
Trip Status
Jam Trip
Description
During normal running (after starting period), the RMS current draw exceeds the prescribed fault level. This fault is generated when current is greater than the Jam Trip
Level for longer than the Jam Delay time after the Jam Inhibit time has expired.
Stall Trip
Underload Trip
During starting, the motor did not reach running speed within the prescribed period. This fault is generated when the
RMS current is greater than
[StallTripLevel] Parameter 75 or longer than [StallEnbldTime] Parameter 74 during motor starting.
Underload protection is for undercurrent monitoring. A trip occurs when the motor current drops below the trip level.
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Output Short Trip
—
—
—
This fault is generated when a hardware output short circuit condition is detected.
User Defined Trip This fault is generated either in response to the rising edge of user input 0...5,
[Input00Function...Input- 05Function]
Parameter 58...63, or by DeviceLogix.
Hardware Fault Trip This fault indicates that a serious hardware problem exists.
Action
1. Check for the source of the jam (for example, excessive load or mechanical transmission component failure).
2. Check [JamInhibitTime] Parameter 70,
[JamTripDelay] Parameter 71, and [JamTripLevel]
Parameter 72 setting.
1. Check for source of stall (for example, excessive load, or mechanical transmission component failure).
2. Check [StallEnabledTime] Parameter 74 and
[StallTripLevel] Parameter 75.
3. Check if [FLASetting] Parameter 28 is set correctly.
Check motor and mechanical system for broken shaft, belts, or gear box. Check [ULInhibitTime] Parameter
76, [ULTripDelay] Parameter 77, [ULTripLevel]
Parameter 78, and [ULWarningLevel] Parameter 79.
—
—
—
Correct, isolate or remove wiring error prior to restarting the system.
This fault is generated based on user configuration.
This fault may be reset after the condition that caused it is removed. For example, the Auxiliary Input goes low or the DeviceLogix logic drives the bit low.
Power cycle to correct. If fault persists the ArmorStart
LT requires replacement.
162
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Diagnostics
Chapter 5
Bulletin 294E Faults
Auto Reset
Drive Control
No
Yes
Bulletin 294E faults are detected by the main control board and/or the internal drive. When there is an internal drive fault, the main control board simply polls the drive for the existence of faults and reports the fault state. Writing a value to
[ProtFltResetMode] Parameter 41 determines auto-reset ability for some faults.
The auto-reset ability of faults that are generated on the drive are controlled by
[AutoRestartTries] Parameter 84 and [AutoRestar Delay] Parameter 85.
Function
Auto-Reset/Run
User Action Needed
[ProtFltResetMode]
Parameter 41 = 1 which is automatic
Auto Reset
Table 28 - Auto Reset Ability
Description
When this type of fault occurs, and [AutoRestartTries] Parameter 84 is set to a value greater than “0,” a user-configurable timer,
[AutoRestartDelay] Parameter 85, begins. When the timer reaches zero, the drive attempts to automatically reset the fault. If the condition that caused the fault is no longer present, the fault will be reset and the drive will be restarted.
This type of fault requires drive or motor repair, or is caused by wiring or programing errors. The cause of the fault must be corrected before the fault can be cleared via manual or network reset. A rising edge of the “Fault Reset” DeviceLogix bit will also clear the fault.
Faults are cleared automatically when the fault condition goes away.
Blink
Pattern
1
Auto-Reset
Capable
Drive
Controlled
2
3
4
5
6
No
Yes
No
Drive
Controlled
No
Table 29 - Fault LED Indicator for Bulletin 294E
Disable Default
No On
No
No
No
No
No
On
On
On
On
On
Bulletin 294E
Overload Trip
(PF 4M Codes 7 and
64)
Trip Status
Phase Short
(PF 4M Codes
38…43)
Under Power Trip
Sensor Short Trip
Over Current
(PF 4M Codes 12 and
63)
Non-Volatile Memory
Trip
(PF 4M Code 100)
Description
This fault is a result of the drive’s Motor
Overload fault or the Drive Overload fault.
Exceeding the Drive overload rating of
150% for 1 minute or 200% for 3 seconds caused the device to trip.
Action
The fault may be reset only after the overload algorithm determines that the motor has sufficiently cooled or that the Drive heatsink temperature falls to an acceptable level. Check the following:
1. Excessive motor load. Reduce load so drive output current does not exceed the current set by
[MotorOLCurrent] Parameter 30.
2. Verify [BoostSelect] Parameter 86 setting.
1. Check the wiring between the drive and motor.
2. Check motor for grounded phase.
3. Replace ArmorStart LT if fault cannot be cleared.
This fault is a result of the drive’s Phase to
Ground Short faults
(Codes 38…40)
or
Phase to Phase Short faults
(Codes
41…43)
.
The ArmorStart LT detected switched or unswitched power dip below 19.2 V for greater than 50 ms, or 13 V for greater than 4 ms.
This error indicates a shorted sensor, shorted input device, wiring input mistakes.
This fault is a result of the drive’s HW
OverCurrent fault or it’s SW OverCurrent fault.
Check control voltage, wiring, and proper polarity (A1/
A2 terminal). Correct power loss or disable fault using
[ProtectFltEnable] Parameter 42.
Correct, isolated or remove wiring error prior to restarting the system.
This is a major fault, which renders the
ArmorStart LT inoperable. Possible causes of this fault are transients induced during
Non-Volatile Storage (NVS) routines.
1. Check for excess load, improper [BoostSelect]
Parameter 86 setting or other causes of excess current or
2. Check load requirements and [SWCurrentTrip]
Parameter 83 setting.
1. If the fault was initiated by a transient, power cycling may clear the problem.
2. This fault may be reset by a [SetToDefaults]
Parameter 68.
3. Replacement of the ArmorStart LT may be required.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
163
Chapter 5
Diagnostics
Blink
Pattern
7
Auto-Reset
Capable
Yes
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Drive
Controlled
Drive
Controlled
Drive
Controlled
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
Table 29 - Fault LED Indicator for Bulletin 294E
Disable Default
No On
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
No
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
Off
On
Bulletin 294E
Trip Status
Parameter Sync
4M Codes 48, 71 and 81)
(PF
DCBusOrDiscnnct
(PF 4M Codes 3, 4 and 5)
Stall Trip
(PF 4M Code 6)
Over Temperature
(PF 4M Code 8)
Ground Fault
(PF 4M Code 13)
Restart Retries
(PF 4M Code 33)
➊
Description
This fault is generated during the parameter synchronization procedure between the Control Module and the internal drive when the syncing process fails resulting in the drive configuration not matching the Control Module configuration.
This fault is a result of the drive’s Power
Loss
(PF 4M Code 3)
, UnderVoltage
(PF 4M
Code 4)
and OverVoltage
(PF 4M Code 5)
faults. When an Undervoltage occurs because the Disconnect has been opened, the condition will be diagnosed as an
“Open Disconnect” trip
During starting the motor did not reach running speed within the prescribed period. This fault occurs when the drive detects a motor stall condition during acceleration.
This fault occurs when the drive detects a heat sink over temperature condition.
This fault occurs a current path to earth ground has been detected at one or more of the drive output terminals.
Drive unsuccessfully attempted to reset a fault and resume running for the programmed number of auto retries.
Action
1. The most common cause of this fault is that the disconnect has been opened, or that power has been removed from the drive. To clear the fault, repower the drive and activate a reset.
2. The drive may have been commanded to default values. Clear the fault or cycle power to the drive.
1. The most common cause of this fault is that the disconnect has been opened, or that power has been removed from the drive. To Clear the fault, repower the drive and activate a reset.
2. Monitor the incoming line for phase loss or line imbalance, low voltage or line power interruption. high line voltage or transient conditions. Bus
OverVoltage can also be caused by motor regeneration.
3. Extending the [DecelTime1] Parameter 37 or
[DecelTime2] Parameter 70 may also help with this fault.
1. Check for source of stall (for example, excessive load, or mechanical transmission component failure).
2. Increase [AccelTime1] Parameter 36 or
[AccelTime2] Parameter 69 or reduce load so drive output current does not exceed the current set by
[CurrentLimit] Parameter 31.
Check for blocked or dirty heat sink fins. Verify that ambient temperature has not exceeded 40° C (104° F).
Check the motor and external wiring to the drive output terminals for a grounded condition.
Drive Hardware Fault Failure has been detected in the drive
Output Short
User Defined power section.
This fault is generated when a hardware output short circuit condition is detected.
This fault is generated either in response to the rising edge of user input 0...5,
[Input00Function...Input- 05Function]
Parameter 58...63.
Hardware Fault Trip This fault indicates that a serious hardware problem exists. This fault is generated when either the PF 4M drive is not detected or an invalid factory configuration setting is detected.
Correct the cause of the fault and manually clear.
Check [AutoRestartTries] Parameter 84 and
[AutoRestartDelay] Parameter 85 meets application needs.
1. Cycle power.
2. Replace unit if failure can not be cleared.
Correct, isolate or remove wiring error prior to restarting the system.
This fault is generated based on user configuration.
This fault may be reset after the condition that caused it is removed. For example, the Auxiliary Input goes low or the DeviceLogix logic drives the bit low.
Power cycle to correct. If fault persists the ArmorStart
LT requires replacement.
➊
In the case of a Disconnect open fault, reclosing the disconnect will cause a reset to be issued.
164
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Chapter
6
Specifications
Power Circuit
Application
Number of Poles
Input Power Terminals
Motor Power Terminals
PE (Earth Ground) Terminal
Maximum Rated Operating Voltage
Rated Impulsed Voltage (
U
imp
)
Dielectric Withstand
Operating Frequency
Maximum Rated Operating
Current
Overload Type
Trip Class
Trip Rating — Full Load
Current (FLC)
Reset Mode
Overload Reset Level
Overvoltage Category
Bulletin 290E/291E
Electrical Ratings
Cat. No.
290_-___-A-*
291_-___-A-*
290_-___-B-*
291_-___-B-*
Three-phase
3
L1, L2, L3
T1, T2, T3
4 PE terminals
400Y/230…480Y/277 (-15%, +10%)
4 kV
UL
: 1960V AC,
IEC
: 2500V AC
50/60 Hz (±10%)
Hp (kW)
2 (1.5)
5 (3)
Solid-state I
2
T
[10]
, 15, 20 with thermal memory retention
(see Motor Overload Trip Curves)
120% of FLC
Automatic or manual
1…100% TCU
III
Overload Range
0.24…3.5 A
1.1…7.6 A
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
165
Chapter 6
Specifications
Electrical Ratings
Control Circuit
(External Source)
Power Supply
Rated Operating Voltage
Overvoltage Protection
Unswitched Power Supply
Requirements
Switched Power Supply
Requirements
Switched and Unswitched
Power Supply Requirements
Voltage
Nominal Current
Power
Input Current (each)
➊
Maximum Current
Maximum Power
Peak Inrush
➋
Voltage
Nominal Current
Power
Output Current (each)
➊
Maximum Current
Maximum Power
Peak Inrush
➋
Voltage
Nominal Current
Power
Number of Inputs (x 50 mA)
Number of Outputs (x 500 mA)
Maximum Current
Maximum Power
Peak Inrush
➋
NEC Class 2
24V DC (+10%, -20%)
Reverse-polarity protected
19.2…26.4V DC
150 mA
3.6 W
50 mA
450 mA
14.4 W
<5 A for 35 ms
19.2…26.4V DC
125 mA
3 W
500 mA
1.625 A
42 W
<5 A for 35 ms
19.2…26.4V DC
275 mA
6.6 W user defined user defined
275 mA + user defined
6.6 W + (24V DC x user defined)
<10 for 35 ms
Control Circuit
(Internal Source)
An internal 50 W power supply sources 24V DC for input, outputs, and logic control.
Cat. No.
290/1_-*-G1 (or G3)
Sym. Amps RMS
10 kA @ 480Y/277
Circuit Breaker
Short Circuit
Current Rating
(SCCR)
290/1_-*-G1 (or G3)
290/1_-*-G2
5 kA @ 480Y/277
10 kA @ 480Y/277
When used with Allen Bradley
Cat. No. 140U-D6D3-C30
Short Circuit
Coordination
➊
I/O is configurable to either input or output.
➋
Assumes zero wire resistance. Wire impedance will reduce current inrush.
Type 1
Size per NFPA 70 (NEC) or NFPA 79 for Group Motor Applications
Fuse
CC, J, or T fuse
(maximum 45 A)
UL Class fuse (maximum 45 A)
CC, J, or T fuse
(maximum 40 A)
166
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Specifications
Chapter 6
Input and Output Ratings
Input
Supply Voltage
Type of Inputs
Connection Type
Input per Connection
Rated Operating Voltage
On-State Input Voltage (pin 4)
Off-State Input Voltage
On-State Input Current (pin 4)
Off-State Input Current
Maximum Sensor Leakage Current
Maximum Number of Input Devices
Maximum Sensor Sourcing Current (pin 1)
Sensor Operating Voltage Range
Input Bounce Filter
➊
(Software Configurable)
Filtering
DeviceLogix I/O Response
Supply Voltage (Switched Power)
Type of Outputs
Load Types
Utilization Category (IEC)
Output State
Connection Type
Output
Output per Connection
Overcurrent Protection
➋
Rated Insulation Voltage (
U
i
)
Rated Operating Voltage (
U
e
)
Maximum Blocking Voltage
Nominal Operating Current (
I
e
)
Maximum Thermal Current (
I
the
)
Maximum Off-state Leakage Current
Maximum Number of Outputs
Surge Suppression
➊
Input ON-to-OFF delay time is the time from a valid input signal to recognition by the module.
➋
If an output exceeds 1.5 A for greater than 7 ms, a fault is generated.
Unswitched power A3/A2
24V DC current sinking
Single keyed M12, quick disconnect
1/each
24V DC
10…26.4V DC, nominal 24V DC
5V DC
1…3.7 mA, 2.6 mA @ 24V DC
<1.5 mA
<2.5 mA
6
50 mA per point (max 300 mA total for sourcing one device)
19.2…26V DC
Off-On or On-Off: 0.5 ms + 64 ms
100 μs
2 ms (500 Hz)
A1/A2
DC sourcing
Resistive or light inductive
DC-1, DC-13
Normally Open (N.O.)
Single keyed M12, quick disconnect
1/each
1.5 A (the sum of all outputs cannot exceed this value)
UL:
1500V AC,
IEC:
2000V AC
19.2…26.4V DC
35V DC
500 mA per point
500 mA per point
1 μA
6
Integrated diode to protect against switching loads
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
167
Chapter 6
Specifications
Operating Temperature Range
Storage and Transportation Temperature Range
Environmental Ratings
-20…+50 °C (-4…+122 °F)
-25...+85 °C (-13…+185 °F)
Pollution Degree
Enclosure Ratings
Approximate Shipping Weight
3
IP66/UL Type 4/12
➊
4.6 kg (10 lb)
Resistance to Shock
Resistance to Vibration
Disconnect Lock Out
Disconnect LOTO Locks
Disconnect Mechanical Life
Contractor Utilization Category
(IEC)
Contactor Opening Delay
Contactor Closing Delay
Minimum Off Time
Contactor Mechanical Life
Wire Size
➋
Wire Type
Tightening Torque
Wire Strip Length
Power Rating
Operational
Non-Operational
Operational
Non-Operational
Power Terminals
(2) #18 …#10 AWG
(0.8…5.2 mm
2
) per terminal
600V AC/25 Amp
Mechanical Ratings
30 G, exceeds IEC 60947-1
50 G, exceeds IEC 60947-1
2.5 G, tested to MIL-STD-810G, exceeds IEC 60947-1
5 G, tested to MIL-STD-810G, exceeds IEC 60947-1
Maximum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) diameter lock shackle or hasp
Up to 2 locks or hasps are supported
200 000 operations
AC-1, AC-3, AC-4 (refer to Life Load Curves)
8…12 ms
18…40 ms
200 ms
15 million operations
Motor Terminals
#18…#10 AWG
(0.8…5.2 mm
2
) per terminal
Control Terminals
(2) #18 …#10 AWG
(0.8…5.2 mm
2
) per terminal
Multi-strand copper wire
10.6 ± 2 lb•in (1.2 ± 0.2 N•m)
0.35 ± 0.01 in. (9 ± 2 mm)
600 V AC/10 Amp 600 V AC/10 Amp
PE/Ground
(2) #16 …#10 AWG
(1.3…5.2 mm
2
) per terminal
18 ± 2 lb•in (2 ± 0.2 N•m)
—
Emission
Emission and Immunity Ratings
Conducted
Radiated
Electrostatic Discharge
Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field
Fast Transient
Immunity
Surge Transient
Radio Frequency Conducted Disturbance
➊
IP66/UL Type 4 is available with gland options G1-3. IP66/UL Type 4/12 available with G1 and G3 gland option
➋
When two wires used in terminal block both wires are to be of same wire AWG.
168
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
EN 60947-4-1
Class A
4 kV contact, 8 kV air
EN 60947-4-1
10V/m, 80 MHz…1 GHz
10V/m, 1.4 GHz…2 GHz
2 kV (Power)
2 kV (PE)
1 kV (Communication and control)
1 kV (12)
L-L
, 2 kV (2)
L-N
(earth)
10V, 150 kHz…80 MHz
Standards Compliance
Certifications
EtherNet/IP
Web Server
Network Connections
Specifications
Chapter 6
UL/CSA
Standards Compliance and Certifications
UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment –
Suitable for Group Installation
CSA C22.2, No. 14
EN/IEC
EN 60947-4-1 Low Voltage Switchgear
CE Marked per Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC and EMC Directive 2004/108/EC
Other Agencies
CCC (Pending)
KCC
C-Tick
ODVA for EtherNet/IP and DeviceNet cULus (File No. E3125, Guide NLDX, NLDX7)
Communication Ratings
Rated Insulation Voltage
Operating Dielectric Withstand
EtherNet/IP ODVA – Conformance Testing
Ethernet Communication Rate
Ethernet Ports
Ethernet Network Topologies Supported
Device Level Ring Support
Ethernet Connector
Ethernet Cable
IP Configuration
DHCP Timeout
Data
Packet Rate (pps)
Consume Instance (Command)
Produce Instance (Status)
Message Support
Address Conflict Detection (ACD)
Sockets
Security
Webpage Features
Concurrent Sessions
Web Server
Concurrent TCP Connections
Maximum I/O Connections (CIP Class 1)
Maximum Concurrent Explicit Messages (CIP Class 3)
Class 1 Connection API
Class 3 Connection API
Request Packet Interval (RPI)
250V
UL/NEMA
: 1500V AC,
IEC
: 2000V AC
EtherNet/IP Interoperability Performance – Per A9 PF 2.1
10/100 Mbps, half or full-duplex
2 (embedded switch)
Star, Tree, Linear, and Ring
Beacon Performance, IEEE 1588 Transparent Clock
M12, D code, female, with Ethernet keying, 4 Pin
Category 5e: Shielded or unshielded
Static, DHCP, or BootP
30 s
Transported over both TCP and UDP
500 packets-per-second (2000 μs), Tx
500 packets-per-second (2000 μs), Rx
Default of 3 words (Instance 150)
Default of 14 words (Instance 152)
Unicast or Multicast
IP v4 Address Conflict Detection for EtherNet/IP devices
150 maximum
Login and password configurable
Support Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
Status, diagnostics, configuration
20
HTTP 1.1
Maximum of 15 encapsulated messages over both TCP and UDP
Supports up to 2 Class 1 CIP connections [Exclusive owner (data) or listen-only]. One connection per PLC. Listen only connection requires a data connection to be established.
6
2…3200 ms
100…10 000 ms
20 ms default (2 ms minimum)
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
169
Chapter 6
Specifications
Motor Overload Trip Curves
170
Class 10
Cold
Hot
% Full Load Current
Class 15
Cold
Hot
% Full Load Current
Class 20
% Full Load Current
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Cold
Hot
Specifications
Chapter 6
Bulletin 100-K/104-K Life-Load Curves
Electrical life; Ue = 400…460V AC
AC-3: Switching of squirrel-cage motors while starting
10
1
100-K09
(Used with ArmorStart LT)
0.1
0.01
1
Electrical life; Ue = 400…460V AC
AC-4: Stepping of squirrel-cage motors
10
(Used with ArmorStart LT)
100-K09
10
Rated Current
Ie
AC-3 [A]
1
0.1
0.01
0.1
1
Rated Current
Ie
AC-4 [A]
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
100
10
171
Chapter 6
Specifications
Bulletin 294E
Power Circuit
Electrical Ratings
Application
Number of Poles
Input Power Terminals
Motor Power Terminals
PE (Earth Ground) Terminal
Maximum Rated Operating Voltage
Rated Impulsed Voltage (
U
imp
)
Dielectric Withstand
Operating Frequency
Three-phase
3
L1, L2, L3
T1, T2, T3
4 PE terminals
400Y/230…480Y/277 (-15%, +10%)
4 kV
UL:
1960V AC,
IEC:
2500V AC
50/60 Hz (±10%)
Electrical Ratings — Variable Frequency Drive
Cat. No.
Maximum Rated
Operating Current
294_-FD1P5*
294_-FD2P5*
294_-FD4P2*
Solid-state
I
2 T type
Overload Protection Trip Class
Overcurrent Protection
Overvoltage Category
Reset Mode
Hp (kW)
0.5 (0.37)
1.0 (0.75)
2.0 (1.5)
Input Amps
400V AC, 50 Hz
2.0
3.7
6.5
Input Amps
480V AC, 60 Hz
1.8
3.0
5.5
150% for 60 s or 200% for 3 s
200% hardware limit, 300% instantaneous fault
III
Output Amps
1.5
2.5
3.6
Class 10 protection with speed sensitive response and power-down overload retention function
Power Circuit
Output Frequency
Efficiency
Overvoltage
Undervoltage
Control Ride Through
Faultless Power Ride Through
Carrier Frequency
Speed Regulation — Open Loop with Slip Compensation
Automatic or manual
0…400 Hz (programmable)
97.5% typical
380…480V AC Input – Trip occurs at 810V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 575V AC incoming line)
380…480V AC Input – Trip occurs at 390V DC bus voltage (equivalent to 275V AC incoming line)
Minimum ride through is 0.5 s — typical value is 2 s
10 ms
2…10 kHz, drive rating based on 4 kHz
±2% of base speed across a 40:1 speed range
Acceleration/Deceleration
Maximum Motor Cable Lengths (Reflected
Wave Protection)
➊
Two independently programmable acceleration and deceleration times. Each time may be programmed from 0…600 s, in 0.1 s increments.
10 m (32 ft)(CE application)
➋
14 m (45.9 ft) (non-CE application)
Source Brake (EM Brake) Current Maximum load current of 3 A
➊
The reflected wave data applies to all frequencies 2…10 kHz.
➋
For CE compliant installations refer to the recommended EMI/RFI cord grip accessory. For availability of the quick disconnect three-phase shielded power and motor cable contact your local sales representative for details.
172
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Specifications
Chapter 6
Electrical Ratings
Control Circuit
(External Source)
Control Circuit
(Internal Source)
Short Circuit Current Rating
(SCCR)
Short Circuit Coordination
Power Supply
Rated Operating Voltage
Overvoltage Protection
Unswitched Power Supply
Requirements
Switched Power Supply
Requirements
Switched and Unswitched
Power Supply Requirements
Voltage
Nominal Current
Power
Input Current (each)
➊
Maximum Current
Maximum Power
Peak Inrush
➋
Voltage
Nominal Current
Power
Output Current (each)
➊
Maximum Current
Maximum Power
Peak Inrush
➋
Voltage
Nominal Current
Power
Number of Inputs (x 50 mA)
Number of Outputs (x 500 mA)
Maximum Current
Maximum Power
Peak Inrush
➋
NEC Class 2
24V DC (+10%, -20%)
Reverse-polarity protected
19.2…26.4V DC
150 mA
3.6 W
50 mA
450 mA
14.4 W
<5 A for 35 ms
19.2…26.4V DC
125 mA
3 W
500 mA
1.625 A
42 W
<5 A for 35 ms
19.2…26.4V DC
275 mA
6.6 W user defined user defined
275 mA + user defined
6.6 W + (24 x user defined), (60 W max.)
<10 A for 35 ms
Cat. No.
294_-*-G1 or (-G3)
An internal 50 W power supply sources 24V DC for input, outputs, and logic control.
Circuit Breaker Sym. Amps RMS
10 kA @ 480Y/277
294_-*-G1 or (-G3)
294_-*-G1-SB
294_-*-G1-SB
294_-*-G2*
5 kA @ 480Y/277
10 kA @ 480Y/277
5 kA @ 480Y/277
When used with Allen-Bradley
Cat. No. 140U-D6D3-C30
Fuse
CC, J, or T fuse
(maximum 45 A)
UL Class fuse
(maximum 45 A)
CC, J, or T fuse
(maximum 40 A)
UL Class fuse
(maximum 40 A)
CC, J, or T fuse
(maximum 40 A)
10 kA @ 480Y/277
Type 1
Size per NFPA 70 (NEC) or NFPA 79 for Group Motor Applications
➊
I/O is configurable to either input or output.
➋
Assumes zero wire resistance. Wire impedance will reduce current inrush.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
173
Chapter 6
Specifications
Input
Input and Output Ratings
Supply Voltage
Type of Inputs
Connection Type
Input per Connection
Rated Operating Voltage
On-State Input Voltage (pin 4)
Off-State Input Voltage
On-State Input Current (pin 4)
Off-State Input Current
Maximum Sensor Leakage Current
Maximum Number of Input Devices
Maximum Sensor Sourcing Current (pin 1)
Sensor Operating Voltage Range
Input Bounce Filter
➊
(Software Configurable)
Output
Filtering
DeviceLogix I/O Response
Supply Voltage (Switched Power)
Type of Outputs
Load Types
Utilization Category (IEC)
Output State
Connection Type
Output per Connection
Overcurrent Protection
➋
Rated Insulation Voltage (
U
i
)
Rated Operating Voltage (
U
e
)
Maximum Blocking Voltage
Nominal Operating Current (
I
e
)
Maximum Thermal Current (
I
the
)
Maximum Off-state Leakage Current
Maximum Number of Outputs
Surge Suppression
➊
Input ON-to-OFF delay time is the time from a valid input signal to recognition by the module.
➋
If an output exceeds 1.5 A for greater than 7 ms, a fault is generated
Unswitched power A3/A2
24V DC current sinking
Single keyed M12, quick disconnect
1/each
24V DC
10…26.4V DC, nominal 24V DC
5V DC
1…3.7 mA, nominal 2.6 mA @ 24V DC
<1.5 mA
<2.5 mA
6
50mA per point (max 300mA total for sourcing one device)
19.2…26V DC
Off-On or On-Off: 0.5 ms + 64 ms
100 μs
2 ms (500 Hz)
A1/A2
DC sourcing
Resistive or light inductive
DC-1, DC-13
Normally Open (N.O.)
Single keyed M12, quick disconnect
1/each
1.5 A (the sum of all outputs cannot exceed this value)
UL
: 1500V AC,
IEC
: 2000V AC
19.2…26.4V DC
35V DC
500 mA per point
500 mA per point
1 μA
6
Integrated diode to protect against switching loads
174
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Specifications
Chapter 6
Operating Temperature Range
Environmental Ratings
-20…+40°C (-4…+104°F)
50 °C (122 °F) without derating, when properly rated line reactors are installed in branch circuit.
Storage and Transportation
Temperature Range
Altitude
Humidity
Pollution Degree
Enclosure Ratings
Approximate Shipping Weight
➊
IP66/UL Type 4 is available with gland options G1-3. IP66/ UL Type 4/12 available with G1 and G3 gland option.
–25...+85 °C (–13…+185 °F)
1000 m
5…95% (non-condensing)
3
IP66/UL Type 4/12
➊
7.3 kg (16 lb)
Resistance to Shock
Resistance to Vibration
Disconnect Lock Out
Disconnect LOTO Locks
Disconnect Mechanical Life
Wire Size
➊
Wire Type
Tightening Torque
Wire Strip Length
Power Rating
Operational
Non-Operational
Operational
Non-Operational
Power Terminals
(2) #18 …#10 AWG
(0.8…5.2 mm
2
) per terminal
600V AC/25 Amp
Mechanical Ratings
30 G (exceeds IEC 61800-5-1)
50 G (exceeds IEC 61800-5-1)
2.5 G, MIL-STD-810G, (exceeds IEC 61800-5-1)
5 G, MIL-STD-810G, (exceeds IEC 61800-5-1)
Maximum of 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) diameter lock shackle or hasp
Up to 2 locks or hasps are supported
200 000 operations
Control Terminals Motor Terminals
#18…#10 AWG
(0.8…5.2 mm
2
) per terminal
(2) #18 …#10 AWG
(0.8…5.2 mm
2 terminal
) per
Multi-strand copper wire
PE/Ground
(2) #16 …#10 AWG
(1.3…5.2 mm
2
) per terminal
10.6 ± 2 lb•in (1.2 ± 0.2 N•m)
18 ± 2 lb•in
(2 ± 0.2 N•m)
600V AC/10 Amp
0.35 ± 0.01 in. (9 ± 2 mm)
600V AC/10 Amp —
Emission
Immunity
Emission and Immunity Ratings
Conducted
Radiated
Electrostatic Discharge
Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field
Fast Transient
Surge Transient
Radio Frequency Conducted Disturbance
➊
When two wires used in terminal block both wires are to be of same wire AWG
EN 55011
(1.0…4.0 mm
2
) per
Class Group 2
Source Brake
#16 …#10 AWG terminal
4.8 ± 2 lb•in
(0.5 ± 0.2 N•m)
600V AC/10 Amp
4 kV contact, 8 kV air
EN 61800-3
10V/m, 80 MHz…1 GHz
2 kV (Power)
2 kV (PE)
1 kV (Communication and control)
1 kV (12)
L-L
, 2 kV (2)
L-N
(earth)
10V, 150 kHz…80 MHz
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
175
Chapter 6
Specifications
Standards Compliance
Certifications
DeviceNet
Standards Compliance and Certifications
UL/CSA EN/IEC
UL 508C Power Conversion Equipment –
Suitable for Group Installation
CSA C22.2, No. 14
EN 61800 - Adjustable Speed Electrical
Power Drive Systems, Part 3: EMC
Requirements and Specific Test Methods,
CE Marked per EMC Directive 2004/108/EC,
Part 5-1: Safety Requirements – Electrical,
Thermal and Energy, CE Marked per Low
Voltage Directive 2005/95/EC cULus (File No. E207834, Guides NMMS, NMMS7)
Other Agencies
CCC (Pending)
KCC
C-Tick
ODVA for EtherNet/IP and DeviceNet
Communication Ratings
Rated Insulation Voltage
Operating Dielectric Withstand
DeviceNet Supply Voltage Rating
DeviceNet Input Current
DeviceNet Input Current Surge
Baud Rates
Distance Maximum
Auto-Baud Rate Identification
"Group 2 - Slave Only" Device Type
Polled I/O Messaging
Change of State Messaging
Cyclic Messaging
Explicit Messaging
Full Parameter Object Support
Group 4 - Off-Line Node Recovery Messaging
Configuring Consistency Value
Unconnected Messaging Manager (UCMN)
UL/NEMA
250V
: 1500V AC,
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
IEC
: 2000V AC
Range 11…25V DC, 24V DC nominal
50 mA @ 24V DC
500 mA peak inrush
125, 250, 500 kbps
500 m (1630 ft) @ 125 kbps
200 m (656 ft) @ 250 kbps
100 m (328 ft) @ 500 kbps
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
176
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
EtherNet/IP
Web Server
Network Connections
Specifications
Chapter 6
Communication Ratings
EtherNet/IP ODVA - Conformance Testing
Ethernet Communication Rate
Ethernet Ports
Ethernet Network Topologies Supported
Device Level Ring Support
Ethernet Connector
Ethernet Cable
IP Configuration
DHCP Timeout
Data
Packet Rate (pps)
Consume Instance (Command)
Produce Instance (Status)
Message Support
Address Conflict Detection (ACD)
Sockets
Security
Webpage Features
Concurrent Sessions
Web Server
Concurrent TCP Connections
Maximum I/O Connections (CIP Class 1)
Maximum Concurrent Explicit Messages (CIP Class 3)
Class 1 Connection API
Class 3 Connection API
Request Packet Interval (RPI)
EtherNet/IP Interoperability Performance – Per A9 PF 2.1
10/100 Mbps, half or full-duplex
2 (embedded switch)
Star, Tree, Linear, and Ring
Beacon Performance, IEEE 1583 Transparent Clock
M12, D code, female, with Ethernet keying, 4 Pin
Category 5e: Shielded or unshielded
Static, DHCP, or BootP
30 s
Transported over both TCP and UDP
500 packets-per-second (2000 μs), Tx
500 packets-per-second (2000 μs), Rx
Default of 4 words (Instance 154)
Default of 16 words (Instance 156)
Unicast or Multicast
IP v4 Address Conflict Detection for EtherNet/IP devices
150 maximum
Login and password configurable
Support Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP)
Status, diagnostics, configuration
20
HTTP 1.1
Maximum of 5 encapsulated messages over both TCP and UDP
Supports up to 2 Class 1 CIP connections [Exclusive owner (data) or listen-only]. One connection per PLC. Listen-only connection requires a data connection to be established.
6
2…3200 ms
100…10 000 ms
20 ms default (2 ms minimum)
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
177
Chapter 6
Specifications
Motor Overload Trip Curves
No Derate
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175
% of Motor Nameplate Hertz (P29)
200
Motor overload current parameter provides class 10 overload protection.
Ambient insensitivity is inherent in the electronic design of the overload.
Min. Derate
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 25 50 75 100 125 150
175
% of Motor Nameplate Hertz (P29)
200
Max. Derate
100
80
60
40
20
0
0 25 50 75 100 125 150 175
% of Motor Nameplate Hertz (P29)
200
178
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Introduction
Appendix
A
Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT
Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Each ArmorStart LT motor controller is listed for group installation. This appendix explains how to use this listing to apply ArmorStart LT motor controllers in multiple-motor branch circuits according to 7.2.10.4(1) and
7.2.10.4(2) of NFPA 79, Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery.
From the perspective of the ArmorStart LT product family, being listed for group installation means one set of fuses or one circuit breaker may protect a branch circuit that has two or more of these motor controllers connected to it. This appendix refers to this type of branch circuit as a multiple-motor branch circuit.
The circuit topology shown in
, is one configuration, but not the only possible configuration, of a multiple-motor branch circuit. In these circuits, a single set of fuses (or a single circuit breaker) protects multiple motors, their controllers and the circuit conductors. The motors may be any mixture of power ratings and the controllers may be any mixture of motor controller technologies
(magnetic motor controllers and variable-frequency AC drive controllers).
This appendix addresses only NFPA 79 applications. This is not because these products are only suitable for industrial machinery, but because industrial machinery is their primary market. In fact, while all versions of the ArmorStart
LT products may be applied on industrial machinery, the versions that have the Conduit Entrance Gland Plate Option may also be used in applications governed by NFPA 70, National Electrical Code (NEC), (see “ArmorStart LT
Product Family”).
In the 2012 Edition of NFPA 79, motor controllers that are listed for group installation may be installed in multiple-motor branch circuits according to either of two alternative sets of requirements. The first is found in 7.2.10.4(2), the second in 7.2.10.4(3). The requirements of 7.2.10.4(3) are similar to those in
430.53(C) of NFPA 70, while the requirements of 7.2.10.4(2) are found only in
NFPA 79. This appendix explains the requirements of 7.2.10.4(2), rather than those of 7.2.10.4(3), because this is the simpler method to use when applying the
ArmorStart LT family of motor controllers.
The user must determine the requirements – NFPA 79 or NFPA 70 – to use for the application. When making this determination, it is necessary to understand the ArmorStart LT product characteristics and useful to understand the definition of industrial machinery. The section of this appendix, “ArmorStart LT
Product Family”, specifies whether a motor controller is suitable for installation according to NFPA 79 or NFPA 70 (or both). The definition of industrial
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
179
Appendix A
Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
ArmorStart LT
Product Family
180
machinery is found in 3.3.56 of NFPA 79 and 670.2 of Article 670, Industrial
Machinery, in NFPA 70.
These conventions are used throughout this appendix. First, although all of the equipment is connected to a three-phase electrical supply, all of the figures are shown as one-line diagrams. Second, although all of the ArmorStart LT motor controllers are listed for group installation with both fuses and a specific family of inverse time circuit breakers, this appendix considers only fuses. This is done to avoid repetitive explanations with minor, but necessary qualifications, for circuit breakers. Generally, the principles for selecting the fuses also apply to selecting inverse time circuit breakers. Third, all references unless indicated otherwise, are to NFPA 79 – 2012.
Figure 58 - ArmorStart LT NFPA 79 Multi-Motor Branch Circuit
Electrical Supply
Final
Overcurrent
Device
Disconnecting
Means
Single Set of Fuses
NFPA 79, 3.3.10 Branch Circuit. The Circuit
Conductors Between the Final Overcurrent Device
Protecting the Circuit and the Outlet(s). [70:100]
Any Mixture of Motor Controller
Technologies
* Each Controller is Listed for Group
Installation with Specified Maximum
Protection
½ HP
Bulletin 294
Overload
Class 10
Nameplate*
2 HP
Bulletin 294
Overload
Class 10
Nameplate*
5 HP
Bulletin 291
Overload
Class 10/15/20
Nameplate*
5 HP
Bulletin 290
Overload
Class 10/15/20
Nameplate*
1 HP
Bulletin 294
Overload
Class 10
Nameplate*
1/2 Hp 2 Hp 5 Hp 5 Hp 1 Hp
Two or More Motors with any
Mixture or Power Ratings
This section contains a brief description of the attributes of the ArmorStart LT motor controllers that are relevant to applying them in multiple-motor branch circuits.
The term motor controller refers to the device that stops and starts the motor.
The ArmorStart LT product family consists of two types of motor controllers.
The Bulletin 290 and 291 controllers are magnetic motor controllers that use an electromechanical contactor to stop and start the motor. The Bulletin 294 motor controllers use a variable-frequency AC drive to stop, start and vary the speed of the motor. This appendix refers to the Bulletin 290, 291 and 294 products as either motor controllers or just controllers.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Appendix A
Each ArmorStart LT motor controller incorporates an integrated overload relay and motor disconnecting means. The Underwriters Laboratories’ (UL) listing for each motor controller confirms that the motor controller — including its integral overload relay and motor disconnecting means — is suitable for motor group installation.
The suitability of each ArmorStart LT motor controller for installation according to either NFPA 79 or NFPA 70 depends on the means of connecting the power circuit wiring. All of the controllers are suitable for installation in multiple-motor branch circuits on industrial machinery according to 7.2.10.4 of NFPA 79. The controllers that have the Conduit Entrance Gland Plate Option are also suitable for installation in multiple-motor branch circuits according to 430.53(C) and
430.53(D) of NFPA 70 (NEC). The controllers that have the Power Media
Gland Plate Option are suitable for installation only on industrial machinery.
These versions are limited to industrial machinery because the UL listing for the power media connectors themselves and their matching cable assemblies covers installation only on industrial machinery.
Multiple-Motor Branch
Circuits and Motor
Controllers Listed for Group
Installation – General
Multiple-motor branch circuits, like that shown in
fundamental tradeoff: protecting more than one controller with a single set of fuses requires more electrical and mechanical robustness in each controller.
In exchange for eliminating the cost and space necessary for a dedicated set of fuses in front of each controller, the construction of each controller itself must be more robust. For the circuit configuration shown in
the ampere rating of the fuse must be large enough to operate all of the motors, without opening, under normal starting and running conditions. This rating of fuse must be larger than the rating permitted to protect a circuit that supplies only a single motor and its controller. In general, as the rating of the fuse increases, so does the magnitude of fault currents that flow until the fuse opens.
This higher magnitude of fault current results in more damage to the controller.
Therefore, the additional controller robustness is necessary to withstand these higher fault currents, without controller damage, that could result in a shock or fire hazard.
Consequently, to the controller, being listed for group installation mostly means the UL testing is performed with fuses that have this practical, and higher, ampere rating. This testing verifies that it is safe to apply this controller in a multiple-motor branch circuit, provided the fuse is of the same class and does not have a rating exceeding that marked on the controller.
The example in
Figure 59 , illustrates this increase in the maximum ampere rating
of fuse that is permitted to protect a controller. This example compares the rating of the fuse used in the UL testing of two variable-frequency AC drive-based motor controllers. Both controllers have a rated power of ½ horsepower and a rated output current of 1.5 amperes. The controller shown on the left is intended for installation in individual-motor branch circuits. The controller shown on the right is the ArmorStart LT Bulletin 294 controller that must be listed for group
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
181
Appendix A
Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery installation to be installed, as intended, in multiple-motor branch circuits. For this example, assume all testing is done with fuses of the same class.
The UL investigation of both controllers is done according to UL 508C, Power
Conversion Equipment. The controllers are connected to the test supply through the three-phase conductors and equipment grounding conductor and then covered with cotton in areas that are likely to vent hot gases and sparks during the tests. During the test, electrical faults are impressed on the output of, and internal to, these variable-frequency AC drive-based controllers. Increasing the ampere rating of the fuses increases the magnitude of the fault currents that flow through and damage the controller before the fuses open. Afterwards, the damage to the controller is evaluated to determine whether a potential shock or fire hazard exists when protected by fuses having this ampere rating. One criterion of the evaluation is the examination of the equipment grounding conductor that must not open during the test, as this could leave exposed conductive parts in an energized state (shock hazard). Another criterion is that the cotton must not ignite, as this indicates the expulsion from the controller of hot gases or molten metal fragments (fire hazard).
Referring to the controller on the left, UL 508C permits the individual-motor testing to be performed with the maximum rating of fuse that can be used to protect an individual-motor branch circuit. According to both NFPA 70 and
NFPA 79, this is 400 percent of the full-load current rating of the largest motor that the controller can supply. In UL 508C, this is taken to be 400 percent of the rated output current of the controller, or 6 amperes.
Referring to the controller on the right, UL 508C permits the group installation testing to be performed with the maximum rating of fuse that can be used to protect a multiple-motor branch circuit. According to both NFPA 70
[430.53(C)) and NFPA 79 (7.2.10.4(3)], this is 250 amperes. This value, derived from the installation requirements of 430.53(C) and 430.53(D) of NFPA 70, is determined by the largest size of power conductor that the ArmorStart LT controller can accept, 10 AWG. Because the UL 508C test covers all possibilities in NFPA 70 and NFPA 79, it permits the maximum value of 250 amperes. This covers 7.2.10.4(2), which permits only 100 amperes. However, in this case, the manufacturer, Rockwell Automation, chose to test and mark with the lower value of 45 amperes. This value was chosen as the tradeoff between the maximum number and type of controllers in the branch circuit — limited by the maximum fuse rating — and the electrical and mechanical robustness engineered into each controller.
Therefore, to make its use in the multiple-motor branch circuit of Figure 58
practical, the ½ horsepower Bulletin 294 controller was engineered to be robust enough to safely contain the damage when protected by a fuse having a rating of 45 amperes, rather than just 6 amperes.
182
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Appendix A
Figure 59 - UL508C Variable-Frequency AC Drive Motor Controller Evaluation
Short-Circuit Test Circuit Short-Circuit Test Circuit
Rated Output
Current = 1.5 A
6A fuse max
UL 508C – test with 6 ampere max
½ HP Motor
Controller
Max = 400% * Rated Output Current
= 400% * 1.5 A = 6 A
Max permitted rating for test fuse based on
Rated Output
Current
Manufacturer’s choice -
Reduce rating for test to 45 A
Max rating for 10 AWG
= 250 A
Max permitted rating for test fuse based on maximum size of power conductors
Bulletin 294
½ HP Motor
Controller
Suitable for motor group installation
Rated Output
Current = 1.5 A
45 A fuse max
Maximum conductor size
= 10 AWG
Maximum conductor size
= 10 AWG
Motor Motor
Maximum Fuse Ampere
Rating According to
7.2.10.4(1) and 7.2.10.4(2)
This section uses
Figure 60 to explain the requirements from 7.2.10.4(1) and
7.2.10.4(2) that are relevant to, and permit, the multiple-motor branch circuit of
The following is the complete text of 7.2.10.4(1) and 7.2.10.4(2) and an
abbreviated version of Table 30 from the 2012 Edition of NFPA 79. The table
is abbreviated to cover the size of conductors that are generally relevant to the
ArmorStart LT motor controllers.
Complete Text -
“7.2.10.4 Two or more motors or one or more motor(s) and other load(s), and their control equipment shall be permitted to be connected to a single branch circuit where short-circuit and ground-fault protection is provided by a single inverse time circuit breaker or a single set of fuses, provided the following conditions under (1) and either (2) or (3) are met:
(1) Each motor controller and overload device is either listed for group installation with specified maximum branch-circuit protection or selected such that the ampere rating of the motor branch short-circuit and ground-fault protective device does not exceed that permitted by 7.2.10.1 for that individual motor controller or overload device and corresponding motor load.
(2) The rating or setting of the branch short-circuit and ground-fault protection device does not exceed the values in
for the smallest conductor in the circuit.”
(3) …(not considered in this appendix)
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
183
Appendix A
Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Table 30 - Abbreviated Table 7.2.10.4
Table 7.2.10.4 Relationship Between Conductor Size and Maximum Rating or Setting of Short-Circuit
Protective Device for Power Circuits Group Installations
Conductor Size (AWG) Maximum Rating
Fuse or Inverse Time*
Circuit Breaker
(amperes)
…
…
14
12
…
…
60
80
10
8
6
…
100
150
200
…
The following text and
provide an explanation of 7.2.10.4(1) and (2). In the following, the text not relevant to
is replaced by ellipsis points (…). Then each individual requirement is underlined and followed by an underlined letter in parentheses. This underlined letter in the following text corresponds to the letter in
“7.2.10.4 Two or more motors (a)…and their control equipment (b) shall be permitted to be connected to a single branch circuit (c) where short-circuit and ground-fault protection is provided by a single inverse time circuit breaker or a single set of fuses (d), provided the following conditions under (1) and…(2)… are met:
(1) Each motor controller and overload device is… listed for group installation with specified maximum branch-circuit protection (e) …
(2) The rating or setting of the branch short-circuit and ground-fault protection device does not exceed the values in Table 7.2.10.4 for the smallest conductor in the circuit.” (f )
Summarizing the requirements relevant to
Figure 58 : 7.2.10.4(1) and 7.2.10.4(2)
permit two or more ArmorStart LT motor controllers to be installed in a single branch circuit provided (1) all the motor controllers are listed for group
installation, (2) the fuse does not exceed the maximum rating that Table 30
permits to protect the smallest conductor and (3) the fuse complies with the maximum fuse ratings of all of the controllers.
184
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Explanatory Example
Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Appendix A
Figure 60 - ArmorStart LT NFPA 79 Multi-Motor Branch Circuit
d
“...a single set of fuses…” f
“The rating or setting of the branch short-circuit and ground-fault protection device does not exceed the values in Table 7.2.10.4 for the smallest conductor in the circuit.”
Branch circuit (shown as dotted lines) – all of the conductors on the load side of the single set of fuses c
“...shall be permitted to be connected to a single branch circuit…” e
“Each motor controller and overload device is ...
listed for group installation with specified maximum branch-circuit protection…”
“Suitable for Motor Group Installation”
Sym. Amps RMS
Fuse
Max. Ratings
5 KA 10 KA
45A 45A*
* Type CC, J and T fuses only b e
Markings that satisfy
7.2.10.4(1)
“... and their control equipment … ”
½ HP
Bulletin 294
Overload
Class 10
Nameplate*
2 HP
Bulletin 294
Overload
Class 10
Nameplate*
5 HP
Bulletin 291
Overload
Class 10/15/20
Nameplate*
5 HP
Bulletin 290
Overload
Class 10/15/20
Nameplate*
1 HP
Bulletin 294
Overload
Class 10
Nameplate* a
“Two or more motors ...”
1/2 HP
FLC =
1.1 A**
2 HP
FLC =
3.4 A**
5 HP
FLC =
7.6 A**
5 HP
FLC =
7.6 A**
* Each controller is listed for group installation with the same specified maximum protection
1 HP
FLC =
2.1 A**
The example addresses the overcurrent protection of the conductors, controllers and motors. Protection for three overcurrent conditions is considered: motor running overloads, short-circuit (line-to-line) faults, and ground-faults (line-toground). The short-circuit fault and ground-fault protection is governed by
7.2.10.4(1) and 7.2.10.4(2) and explained in Requirements 1,2 and 3 and
Figure 61 . The overload protection, explained in Requirement 4, is governed by
7.3.1 and 7.3.1.1. Overload coordination depends on each conductor having the minimum ampacity given by 12.5.3 and 12.5.4. The method for determining this minimum ampacity is explained in Requirement 5 and
.
The example branch circuit is shown in
Figure 61 and Figure 62 . The circuit
topology consists of a set of 10 AWG conductors that supply multiple sets of 14
AWG conductors. Each set of 14 AWG conductors supply a controller and motor. These conductor sizes are chosen to be the smallest conductors that have sufficient ampacity, without derating, for the loads each must carry. All of the wiring is customer-supplied, rather than the ArmorConnect Power Media, because all controllers have the Conduit Entrance Gland Plate Option. Fuses protect the branch circuit.
The example addresses five basic requirements that the motor controllers, fuses and conductors must satisfy. The letters in the circles on
and
are referenced in the explanations as letters in parentheses. Ellipses points (…) are used to replace NFPA 79 text that is not applicable to the multiple-motor branch circuit shown in
Figure 61 and Figure 62 . Unless indicated, all text is
from NFPA 79.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
185
Appendix A
Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Figure 61 - ArmorStart LT NFPA 79 Multi-Motor Branch Circuit —
Conductor and Controller Protection
Electrical Supply -
480Y/277V
Available Fault Current
Sym. Amps RMS 9 KA
Disconnecting
Means
Fuses
45 A Max,
CC, J or T d a
Branch short-circuit and ground-fault protection device
Combined Load Conductors
Controller ratings further restrict the fuse
“Suitable for Motor Group Installation”
Sym. Amps RMS
Fuse
Max. Ratings
5 KA 10 KA
45A 45A*
* Type CC, J and T fuses only d
Compare to controller max fuse ratings a
½ HP
Bulletin 294
Overload
Class 10
Nameplate*
2 HP
Bulletin 294
Overload
Class 10
Nameplate*
5 HP
Bulletin 291
Overload
Class 10/15/20
Nameplate*
5 HP
Bulletin 290
Overload
Class 10/15/20
Nameplate*
Table 7.2.10.4
Max
Fuse
AWG (A)
- -
14 60
12 80
10 100
8 150
- -
Conductor protection -
60 A max, any class c
7.2.10.4(2) -
“smallest conductor in the circuit”
= 14 AWG b
Conductor protection
Determine fuse class and max rating for conductor protection
1/2 HP
FLC =
1.1 A**
“Smallest conductor”
2 HP
FLC =
3.4 A**
5 HP
FLC =
7.6 A**
5 HP
FLC =
7.6 A**
10 AWG
1 HP
Bulletin 294
Overload
Class 10
Nameplate*
* Each controller is suitable for group installation with the same maximum ratings of fuse.
** Table 430.250 of NFPA 70-2011
1 HP
FLC =
2.1 A**
Figure 62 - ArmorStart LT NFPA 79 Multi-Motor Branch Circuit Minimum Conductor Ampacity
Electrical Supply
Min Amp. =
125% * 1.8 A
I1 =
1.8 A c
Min Amp. =
125% * 5.5 A
Minimum Required Ampacity (MRA)
MRA = 1.25 * Max {controller input currents} + Sum {remaining controller input currents}
Controller input currents = {I1,I2,I3,I4,I5}
Max controller input current = I3 = I4, choose I3 as Max (either is ok)
MRA = 1.25 * I3 + (I1 + I2 + I4 + I5}
= 1.25 * 7.6 A + (1.8 A + 5.5 A + 7.6 A + 3.0 A) = 27.4 A
Combined Load Conductors
10 AWG
I2 =
5.5 A
Min Amp. =
125% * 7.6 A
I3 =
7.6 A a
Min Amp. =
125% * 7.6 A
I4 =
7.6 A b
Min Amp. =
125% * 3.0 A
I5 =
3.0 A
Min Amp. =
125% * 1.1A
½ HP
Bulletin
294
1.1 A
1/2 HP
FLC =
1.1 A**
2 HP
Bulletin
294
3.4 A
Min Amp. =
125% * 7.6 A
5 HP
Bulletin
291
7.6 A a
Min Amp. =
125% * 7.6 A
5 HP
Bulletin
290
7.6 A b
Min Amp. =
125% * 2.1 A
1 HP
Bulletin
294
2.1 A
Min Amp. =
125% * 3.4 A
2 HP
FLC =
3.4 A**
5 HP
FLC =
7.6 A**
5 HP
FLC =
7.6 A**
1 HP
FLC =
2.1 A**
** Table 430.250 of NFPA 70-2011
186
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Appendix A
1. Requirement One: Controller Ratings
— The motor controllers and overload relays must be listed for group installation with specified maximum branch-circuit protection.
Text:
“7.2.10.4(1) Each motor controller and overload device is… listed for group installation with specified maximum branch-circuit protection…”
Analysis:
To apply the ArmorStart LT motor controllers in the multiple-motor branch circuit shown in
Figure 61 , 7.2.10.4(1) must be satisfied; each controller
must be listed for group installation with specified maximum branch-circuit protection. The UL listing for each ArmorStart LT motor controller confirms that it – including its integral overload relay and motor disconnecting means — is suitable for motor group installation with specified fuses, satisfying 7.2.10.4(1).
The Bulletin 290E and 291E controllers are listed for group installation according to UL 508, Industrial Control Equipment. The Bulletin 294E controllers are listed for group installation according to UL 508C, Power
Conversion Equipment.
Referring to
Figure 62 (a) indicates the markings on the nameplate that satisfy
7.2.10.4(1). The marking “Suitable for Motor Group Installation” satisfies the requirement to be listed for group installation. The ratings located beneath the description “Max. Ratings” are the specified maximum branch circuit protection.
The (a) beside the fuse(s) indicates that the maximum protection specified on the nameplate applies to these fuse(s).
2. Requirement Two: Conductor Short-circuit and Ground-Fault
Protection
— The fuse must protect the conductors for short-circuit faults and ground faults.
Text:
“7.2.10.4(2) The rating or setting of the branch short-circuit and groundfault protection device does not exceed the values in
for the smallest conductor in the circuit.”
Analysis:
Referring to
Figure 61 , 7.2.10.4(2) must be satisfied. The fuse, as indicated by the description in Figure 61
(a), is the branch short-circuit and ground-fault protection device. The word circuit means the branch circuit.
The conductors of the branch circuit start at the load side of the fuses and end at the input to the motor, including the conductors between the motor controllers and the motor. The smallest conductor in the circuit is any one of the 14 AWG conductors that supply each controller and motor. The note at (b) indicates the conductor protection is based on the smallest conductor,
14 AWG. Referring to
Table 30 a 14 AWG conductor may be used in a circuit
that is protected by a fuse of any class having a rating of 60 amperes or less (c).
Therefore, selecting a fuse of any class with a maximum rating of 60 amperes satisfies the conductor protection requirement of 7.2.10.4(2).
Supplementary Note 1:
The value specified in Table 30 is the maximum rating
of fuse that 7.2.10.4(2) permits to protect that size of conductor. The rating of
the fuse may be set to the maximum value given by Table 30 for the smallest
conductor without further justification. However, if any controller, or other
component, has a maximum rating of fuse that is less than the Table 30
value, the
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
187
Appendix A
Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
188
maximum rating of the fuse protecting the branch circuit must be reduced to the lower value so that all components are applied according to their ratings. For example, as shown in Requirement Three, a lower value may be necessary to protect the motor controller within its ratings because its specified maximum
protection is less than the rating that Table 30 permits for the smallest circuit
conductor. Another reason to use a lower rating of fuse is to provide more conservative conductor and controller protection. However, in all cases it is important to ensure the ampere rating is sufficient to start and operate the motors without nuisance opening of the fuse(s).
Supplementary Note 2:
The note at (b) points to the conductor on the output of the ½ Hp Bulletin 294E controller in order to emphasize that the smallest conductor in the circuit includes the conductors between each controller and motor. This includes the output of the variable-frequency AC drive-based
Bulletin 294E controllers; even though these drives have electronic short-circuit protection. According to NFPA 79, the fuse, and not the drive’s electronic shortcircuit protection, provides the short-circuit fault and ground-fault protection for these output conductors.
Supplementary Note 3:
Generally, connecting a smaller conductor to a larger conductor requires the installation of fuses at the connection. This connection may be made without this fuse, in some cases, through the use of a tap rule that indirectly protects the smaller conductor by limiting two things: the ratio of the ampacity of the larger conductor to the ampacity of the smaller conductor and the maximum length of the smaller conductor (see, for example, 7.2.8.2). When applying 7.2.10.4(2), such a tap rule is neither applicable nor necessary. In
Figure 61 , the smaller 14 AWG conductors may be connected to combined load
conductors of any size because 7.2.10.4 does not indirectly protect the smaller conductor by limiting the ratio of the larger to smaller conductor ampacities and
the conductor length. Instead, Table 30 protects the smallest conductor directly
by specifying the maximum rating of fuse that may protect a branch circuit that contains a conductor of that size.
3. Requirement Three: Controller Short-Circuit and Ground-Fault
Protection
— Each motor controller must be protected according to its own ratings, that is, applied in accordance with its listing.
Text:
“(1) Each motor controller and overload device is… listed for group installation with specified maximum branch-circuit protection…”
Analysis:
See (d) in
Figure 61 . The characteristics of the fuse(s) permitted to
protect the conductors (see Requirement 2) must now be compared to those in the controller’s ratings. To comply with the listing of each motor controller and overload relay, the fuse(s) must comply with the maximum branch-circuit protection specified in the controller markings. Therefore, the fuse(s) must be of a class marked on all of the controllers and the rating of the fuse(s) must not exceed the rating marked on any of the controllers. The markings of each controller specify that a fuse having a maximum rating of 45 A may protect the motor controller. When connecting to an electrical supply having an available fault current of 5000 amperes or less, the class of the fuse is not specified and may be any class. When connecting to an electrical supply having an available fault
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Appendix A
current between 5000 and 10000 amperes, the class of the fuse must be CC, J or T. Since the electrical supply has an available fault current of 9000 amperes, selecting a Class CC, J or T fuse with a rating of 45 A or less ensures each motor controller is applied within its own ratings.
Supplementary Note 1:
The rating of the fuse must not exceed the rating permitted by 7.2.10.4(2) to protect the smallest conductor in the circuit.
Selecting a Class CC, J or T fuse with a rating of 45 amperes, being less than 60 amperes, also protects the conductors (see Requirement 2). Although the
ArmorStart LT products presently have a maximum fuse rating of 45 A, future controllers may have maximum fuse ratings that exceed 60 A. In this case, the maximum rating of fuse is limited by the rating to protect the 14 AWG conductors, 60 A. The maximum rating permitted for the controller, 45 A, is a maximum rating and can be reduced, for more conservative protection, provided nuisance opening of the fuses do not occur.
Supplementary Note 2:
In this appendix, a fuse having a rating of any class means a fuse having the let-through characteristics of an Class RK-5 fuse. Class
RK-5 fuses are assumed to have the maximum let-through of any class of fuse. For this reason, the ArmorStart LT motor controllers that are marked for use with fuses, without a restriction to a particular class, have been tested with and are intended to be used with fuses having a class of RK-5. Of course, fuses of a class that have lower let-throughs than Class RK-5, such as Class CC, J or T, are also acceptable. A fuse having a rating of any class also restricts the fuse to those that have been evaluated for use as branch-circuit protection devices. This means that semiconductor fuses, used to protect power electronic equipment, or supplemental fuses cannot be used to protect the multiple-motor branch circuit.
Supplementary Note 3:
There are four complementary ratings relevant to the
“specified maximum branch-circuit protection” of 7.2.10.4(1). They are: the fuse class, the maximum fuse rating, the voltage rating and connection of the source
(480Y/277 V), and the available fault current of the source. Applying the controllers according to these four ratings means that a fault on the output of all the controllers, and internal faults for Bulletin 294 controllers, will not result in a shock or fire hazard.
Supplementary Note 4:
In this example, the assumption is made that the available fault current at the controller is that of the source on the line side of the fuses. Although it is true that the wiring impedance between the fuses and the first controller reduce the fault current available at the controllers, this reduction is neglected by assuming the first controller, the ½ horsepower
Bulletin 294 controller, is very close to the fuses.
4. Requirement Four: Overload Protection
— The motors, conductors and controllers must be protected against motor overload conditions.
Text:
“7.3.1 General. Overload devices shall be provided to protect each motor, motor controller, and branch-circuit conductor against excessive heating due to motor overloads or failure to start.”
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
189
Appendix A
Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
“7.3.1.1 Motors. Motor overload protection shall be provided in accordance with
Article 430, Part III, of NFPA 70.”
Analysis:
Each ArmorStart LT motor controller incorporates an integral overload relay. This overload function must be set in accordance with Article 430,
Part III of NFPA 70. Selecting the ampacity of the circuit conductors appropriately (see Requirement 5) ensures the overload relays, when set according to 7.3.1.1, will protect the conductors against overheating due to motor overloads.
Supplementary Note:
Each individual controller overload relay directly protects the conductors connected to the input and output of that controller and the motor that the controller supplies. The combined load conductor is protected by the tripping of one or more of the controller overload relays, which remove(s) the overloaded motor(s) before the combined load conductor overheats.
5. Requirement: Conductor Ampacity
—The minimum ampacity of conductors.
Text:
“12.5.3 Motor circuit conductors supplying a single motor shall have an ampacity not less than 125 percent of the motor full-load current rating.”
“12.5.4 Combined load conductors shall have an ampacity not less than … 125 percent of the full-load current rating of the highest rated motor plus the sum of the full-load current ratings of all other connected motors…”
Analysis:
Referring to
Figure 62 , (a), (b) and (c) explain the method for
calculating the minimum required conductor ampacity for each of these conductors: input and output conductors of Bulletin 290E and 291E controllers
(a), input and output conductors of Bulletin 294E controllers (b) and combined load conductors that supply Bulletin 290E, 291E and 294E controllers (c). The currents I1 through I5 are the input currents to the controllers. For the Bulletin
290E and 291E controllers, these are the same as the output motor currents. For the Bulletin 294E controllers, these currents are the rated input currents.
The example does not address conditions of use such as an ambient temperature exceeding 30 °C or more than three current-carrying conductors in a cable or raceway. In a particular application, these conditions of use may require derating of the ampacity given in Table 12.5.1. This example assumes that, under the conditions of use, both conductors have sufficient ampacity for the application.
This means the 14 AWG conductors have an ampacity of no less than
9.5 A and the 10 AWG conductors have an ampacity of no less than
27.4 A.
190
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Appendix A
Input and Output Conductors of Bulletin 290E and 291E
Controllers (a)
For Bulletin 290E and 291E controllers, which use an electromechanical contactor to control the motor, the input current, like the output current, is just the current to the motor. Therefore, the minimum conductor ampacity for both input and output conductors is 125 percent of the motor full-load current rating, as specified in the text of 12.5.3 (a).
Referring to
Figure 62 , the full-load current rating of a three-phase, 460 V, 5 Hp
induction motor is 7.6 amperes. Using this value, both the input and output conductors must have an ampacity that is not less than 125% of 7.6 A or 9.5 A.
Input and Output Conductors of Bulletin 294E Controllers
(b)
The Bulletin 294E controllers use a variable-frequency AC drive to control the motor. These drives use a power conversion method that generates input currents that are larger than the output currents. The input currents are larger because, unlike the output currents to the motor, they are not sinusoidal. Consequently, when determining the minimum ampacity of the input conductors, the requirement of 12.5.3 must be based on the rated input current of the controller, rather than the full-load current rating of the motor. Therefore, the minimum ampacity of the input conductors must be 125% of the controller rated input current, while that of the output conductors must be 125% of the motor full-load current rating.
Referring to
Figure 62 , the 1 Hp Bulletin 294E controller has a rated input
current of 3.0 amperes. Using the rated input current, the conductors from the combined load conductors to the controllers must have an ampacity of 125% of 3.0 A or 3.75 A. The output conductors must have an ampacity of 125% of
2.1 A or 2.6 A.
Combined Load Conductors
(c)
The requirement for the minimum ampacity of the combined load conductors is given by 12.5.4. When the combined load conductors supply one or more
Bulletin 294E controllers, the minimum ampacity calculation of 12.5.4 must be made by substituting the rated input current of the Bulletin 294E controllers for the full-load current rating of the motors that these controllers supply.
, the currents I1, I2, I3, I4 and I5 are the input currents to each controller. I3 and I4 are the full-load current ratings of the 5 Hp motors. I1, I2 and I5 are the rated input currents of the Bulletin 294E controllers. Referring to the explanatory text (c) in
Figure 62 , the method for calculating the minimum
ampacity of the combined load conductors follows: first, multiply the largest input current to any controller – Bulletin 290E, 291E or 294E - by 125%. In this case, the input currents to the Bulletin 290E and 291E controllers, I3 and I4, are the largest, 7.6 A. Because they are the same, either can be used. Choose I3 to calculate 125% of the maximum. 125% of 7.6 A is 9.5 A. Second, sum the remaining input currents (I1, I2, I4, I5) for a total of 17.9 A. Third, add the result from the first step to the result from the second for a total of 27.4 A. Finally, the minimum ampacity of the combined load conductors is 27.4 A.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
191
Appendix A
Applying More Than One ArmorStart LT Motor Controller in a Single Branch Circuit on Industrial Machinery
Supplementary Note 1:
The input currents to the Bulletin 294E motor controllers are larger than the output currents to the motor because the input currents contain harmonics resulting from the power conversion process.
This harmonic content and the magnitude of the resulting non-sinusoidal input currents depend on the impedance of the electrical supply. The value specified for the rated input current is the maximum value over the range of possible supply impedances. For this reason, the magnitude of current measured on a particular electrical system may be less than the specified value.
192
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
High Level Product
Description
Appendix
B
CIP Information
The ArmorStart LT EtherNet/IP is an extension of the ArmorStart LT
DeviceNet. Three product types offered:
Table 31 - ArmorStart LT Distributed Starter Type
Bulletin Number
290E
291E
294E
Distributed Starter Type
DOL
Reversing
V/Hz
Product Codes and Name Strings
The following table lists the product codes and name strings that will be added to the ArmorStart LT product family for EtherNet/IP.
Table 32 - Product Codes and Name Strings
0x351
0x352
0x3C2
0x3C4
0x3C6
0x3D2
0x3D4
0x3D6
Product
Code
0x301
0x302
0x311
0x312
0x341
0x342
Current
Rating
0.24…3.5 amps
1.1…7.6 amps
0.24…3.5 amps
1.1…7.6 amps
0.24…3.5 amps
1.1…7.6 amps
0.24…3.5 amps
1.1…7.6 amps
0.5…2.5 amps
1.1…5.5 amps
3.2…16 amps
0.5…2.5 amps
1.1…5.5 amps
3.2…16 amps
Identity Object Name String
ArmorStart 290E 0.24…3.5 A
ArmorStart 290E 1.1…7.6 A
ArmorStart 290EP 0.24…3.5 A
ArmorStart 290EP 1.1…7.6 A
ArmorStart 291E 0.24…3.5 A
ArmorStart 291E 1.1…7.6 A
ArmorStart 291EP 0.24…3.5 A
ArmorStart 291EP 1.1…7.6 A
ArmorStart 294E 0.5 Hp
ArmorStart 294E 1.0 Hp
ArmorStart 294E 2.0 Hp
ArmorStart 294EP 0.5 Hp
ArmorStart 294EP 1.0 Hp
ArmorStart 294EP 2.0 Hp
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
Integrated
Power Supply
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
No
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
193
Appendix B
CIP Information
CIP Explicit Connection
Behavior
The ArmorStart LT allows run, jog and user outputs to be driven by connected explicit messages when no I/O connection exists, or when a I/O connection exists in the idle state. a single EtherNet/IP Class 3 explicit connection will be allowed to send “explicit control” messages via an “Active Explicit” connection.
An EtherNet/IP Class 3 explicit connection becomes the “explicit control” connection when it becomes the first EtherNet/IP Class 3 explicit connection to send a “set” service to one of the following:
•
The “value” attribute of any Discrete Output Point (DOP) instance (Class
Code 0x09).
•
The “data” attribute of any output (consumed) Assembly instance (Class
Code 0x04).
•
Attribute 3 or 4 of the Control Supervisor Object (Class Code 0x29).
EDS Files
The information contained in the EDS (Electronic Data Sheet) files for
ArmorStart LT EtherNet/IP can be extracted via the network.
CIP Object Requirements
194
The following CIP objects will be covered in the following subsections:
For convenience, all objects that are accessible via the EtherNet/IP port are included.
0x000B
0x000F
0x0010
0x001D
0x001E
0x0029
0x002C
0x0047
0x0097
0x098
Class
0x0001
0x0002
0x0004
0x0006
0x0008
0x0009
0x000A
Object
Identity Object
Message Router
Assembly Object
Connection Manager Object
Discrete Input Point Object
Discrete Output Point Object
Analog Input Point
Analog Output Point
Parameter Object
Parameter Group Object
Discrete Input Group Object
Discrete Output Group Object
Control Supervisor
Overload Object
Device Level Ring Object
DPI Fault Object
Alarm Object
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
CIP Information
Appendix B
Class
0x00F5
0x00F6
0x0376
0x032F
Object
TCP/IP Interface Object
Ethernet Link Object
Trip and Warning Email Object
Email Object
Identity Object
Attribute ID
1
2
Access Rule
Get
Get
CLASS CODE 0x0001
The following class attributes are supported for the Identity Object:
Name
Revision
Max Instance
Data Type
UINT
UINT
Value
1
2 for Bulletin 290E/291E and 3 for Bulletin 294E
Instance
1
3
Two instances of the Identity Object will be supported for Bulletin 290E and Bulletin
291E; 3 for Bulletin 294E. The following table shows what each instance will represent.
Name
Main Control Board
PowerFlex 4M (Bulletin 294E only)
Revision Attribute
The firmware rev of the main control board operating system
The firmware revision of the PowerFlex 4M
Each instance of the Identity Object will contain the following attributes:
Attribute ID
2 Get Type
3 ➊ Get Product Code
Revision
Minor Revision
7
6
➊
8
102
Access Rule
Get
Get
Get
Get
Name Data Type
UINT
UINT
UINT
Structure of:
USINT
USINT
1
22
Product Code specific.
Value
WORD
Bit 0 - 0 = Not Owned; 1 = Owned by Master
Bit 2 - 0 = Factory Defaulted; 1 = Configured
Bits 4-7 – Extended Status (see table below)
Bit 8 - Minor Recoverable fault
Bit 9 - Minor Unrecoverable fault
Bit 10 - Major Recoverable fault
Bit 11 - Major Unrecoverable fault
Unique number for each device Serial Number
Product Name
String Length
ASCII String
State
Build
UDINT
Structure of:
USINT
STRING
USINT
UINT
Product Code specific
Returns the value 3 = Operational
Unique value depending on output of the parameter checksum algorithm.
Firmware Build Number UDINT
➊
See product code definitions in
Table 32 , Product Codes and Name Strings.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
195
Appendix B
CIP Information
Extended Device Status Field (bits 4-7) in “Status” Instance Attribute 5 on previous page
5
6
3
4
7
Value
0
1
2
Description
Self-testing or unknown
Firmware update in progress
At least one faulted I/O connection
No I/O connections established
Non-volatile configuration bad
Major fault – either bit 10 or bit 11 is true (1)
At least one I/O connection in run mode
At least one I/O connection established, all in idle mode
The following common services will be implemented for the Identity Object:
Service Code Class
Implemented for:
Instance Service Name
0x01 Yes Yes Get_Attributes_All
0x05 No Yes Reset
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attributes_Single
Message Router CLASS CODE 0x0002
No class or instance attributes will be supported. The message router object exists only to route explicit messages to other objects.
Assembly Object
Attribute ID
1
CLASS CODE 0x0004
The following class attribute is supported for the Assembly Object:
Access Rule Name
Get Revision
Data Type
UINT
Value
2
Attribute ID
1
The following static Assembly instance attributes will be supported for each
Assembly instance:
Access Rule
Get
Name
Number of Members in Member List UINT
Member List
Member Data Description
Data Type
Array of STRUCT
UINT
Member Path
UINT
Packed
EPATH
Array of CIP paths
Size of Member Data in bits
Value
—
Size of Member Path in bytes
Member EPATHs for each assembly instance
196
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
CIP Information
Appendix B
Attribute ID
3
4
Access Rule
Conditional
Get
Data
Size
Name
100 Get String
Data Type
Array of BYTE
UINT
STRING
Value
—
Number of bytes in attribute 3
—
The following services will be implemented for the Assembly Object:
Implemented for:
Class Instance Service Name Service Code
0x0E
0x10
Byte
0
Bit 7
—
Byte
—
Bit 7
—
Bit 6
—
Bit 6
—
I/O Assemblies
The following table summarizes the Assembly instances that are supported in the
ArmrorStart EtherNet/IP product:
Instance Type
3 Consumed
Description
Required ODVA Consumed Instance
52
100
Produced
Config
Required ODVA Produced Instance
Configuration Assembly for Bulletin 290E/291E Starters
101
150
152
154
156
Config
Consumed
Produced
Consumed
Produced
Configuration Assembly for Bulletin 294E Starters
Default Consumed Instance for Bulletin 290E/291E units
Exhaustive Produced Status Assembly Instance
Default Consumed Instance for Inverter type (Bulletin 294E) units
Exhaustive Produced Drive Status Assembly Instance
Instance 3
Instance 3 is the required output (consumed) assembly.
Bit 5
—
Instance 3 "ODVA Cmd"
Bit 4 Bit 3
— —
Bit 2
—
Bit 1
—
Instance 52
Instance 52 is the required input (produced) assembly.
Bit 5
—
Instance 52 "ODVA Status"
Bit 4 Bit 3
— —
Bit 2
RunningForward
Bit 1
—
Bit 0
Run Forward
Bit 0
TripPresent
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
197
Appendix B
CIP Information
198
Instance 100
29
30
27
28
25
26
23
24
33
34
31
32
35
21
22
19
20
17
18
15
16
13
14
11
12
9
10
7
8
Member Index
0
1
2
5
6
3
4
Instance 100 is the Configuration Assembly for Bulletin 290E and 291E units.
Instance 100 for Bulletin 290E/291E Starters
Byte Offset Name
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32
34
36
38
40
42
44
46
48
50
52
54
56
58
60
62
64
66
68
70
Reserved for Logix
AssemblyRevision
FLASetting
OLResetLevel
OverloadClass
ProtFltResetMode
ProtectFltEnable
WarningEnable
RunNetFltAction
RunNetFltValue
RunNetIdleAction
RunNetIdleValue
IOPointConfigure
FilterOffOn
FilterOnOff
OutProtFltState
OutProtFltValue
OutNetFltState
OutNetFltValue
OutNetIdleState
OutNetIdleValue
Input00Function
Input01Function
Input02Function
Input03Function
Input04Function
Input05Function
NetworkOverride
CommOverride
KeypadMode
KeypadDisable
OLWarningLevel
JamInhibitTime
JamTripDeley
JamTripLevel
JamWarningLevel
Parameter Instance
N/A
N/A
28
29
30
41
42
43
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
69
70
71
72
73
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
CIP Information
Appendix B
Member Index
36
37
40
41
38
39
Instance 100 for Bulletin 290E/291E Starters
Byte Offset Name
76
78
72
74
StallEnableTime
StallTripLevel
ULInhibitTime
ULTripDelay
Parameter Instance
74
75
80
82
ULTripLevel
ULWarnLevel
78
79
76
77
Instance 101
21
22
19
20
17
18
15
16
25
26
23
24
13
14
11
12
9
10
7
8
Member Index
0
1
2
5
6
3
4
Instance 101 is the Configuration Assembly for Bulletin 294E units.
40
42
36
38
32
34
28
30
48
50
44
46
52
24
26
20
22
16
18
12
14
Instance 101 for Bulletin 294E Starters
Byte Offset Name
0
2
AssemblyRevision
AssemblyRevision
8
10
4
6
MotorNPVolts
MotorNPHertz
MotorOLCurrent
CurrentLimit
StopMode
SpeedReference
MinimumFreq
MaximumFreq
AccelTime1
DecelTime1
SCurvePercent
JogFrequency
JogAccelDecel
ProtFltResetMode
ProtectFltEnable
WarningEnable
RunNetFltAction
RunNetFaultValue
RunNetIdleAction
RunNetIdleValue
IOPointConfigure
FilterOffOn
FilterOnOff
OutProtFltState
OutProtFltValue
48
49
46
47
43
45
41
42
52
53
50
51
39
40
37
38
35
36
33
34
Parameter Instance
N/A
N/A
28
31
32
29
30
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
199
Appendix B
CIP Information
200
55
56
53
54
51
52
49
50
47
48
45
46
43
44
41
42
61
62
63
59
60
57
58
39
40
37
38
35
36
33
34
Member Index
27
28
31
32
29
30
Instance 101 for Bulletin 294E Starters
106
108
110
112
98
100
102
104
94
96
90
92
86
88
82
84
122
124
126
114
116
118
120
78
80
74
76
70
72
66
68
Byte Offset
54
56
62
64
58
60
AccelTime2
DecelTime2
MotorOLRetention
InternalFreq
SkipFrequency
SkipFreqBand
DCBrakeTime
DCBrakeLevel
ReverseDisable
FlytingStartEna
Compensation
SlipHertzAtFLA
BusRegulateMode
MotorOLSelect
SWCurrentTrip
AutoRestartTries
Name
OutNetFaultState
OutNetFaultValue
OutNetIdleState
OutNetIdleValue
Input00Function
Input01Function
Input02Function
Input03Function
Input04Function
Input05Function
NetworkOverride
CommOverride
KeypadMode
KeypadDisable
AutoRestartDelay
BoostSelect
MaximumVoltage
MotorNamPlateFLA
BrakeMode
BrkFreqThresh
BrkCurrThresh
83
84
81
82
79
80
77
78
75
76
73
74
71
72
69
70
Parameter Instance
54
55
58
59
56
57
66
67
64
65
62
63
60
61
89
90
91
87
88
85
86
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
CIP Information
Appendix B
Byte Bit 7
0 —
4
5
2 Pt07DeviceIn
3 Pt15DeviceIn
Instance 150
Instance 150 is the default Output (Consumed) Assembly for Bulletin 290E/
291E starters.
Instance 150 "Starter Cmd" – DeviceLogix Consumed Assembly for Bulletin 290E/291E Starters
Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1
—
—
—
Out05
—
Out04
—
Out03
ResetFault
Out02
RunReverse
Out01
Pt06DeviceIn
Pt14DeviceIn
Pt05DeviceIn
Pt13DeviceIn
Pt04DeviceIn
Pt12DeviceIn
Pt03DeviceIn
Pt11DeviceIn
AnalogDeviceIn (low byte)
AnalogDeviceIn (high Byte)
Pt02DeviceIn
Pt10DeviceIn
Pt01DeviceIn
Pt09DeviceIn
Bit 0
RunForward
Out00
Pt00DeviceIn
Pt08DeviceIn
Instance 152
Instance 152 is the Exhaustive Starter Status Assembly for Bulletin 290E/291E starters.
19
20
21
17
18
15
16
13
14
11
12
9
10
7
8
5
6
3
4
Byte Bit 7
Instance 152 "Starter Stat" – DeviceLogix Produced Assembly for Bulletin 290E/291E Starters
Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
0 Reserved
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
CurrentFlowing
DisconnectClosed
NetControlStatus
Pt05
Ready
Pt04
Reserved
RunningReverse RunningForward WarningPresent
KeyPadHand
Pt03
KeyPadOff
Pt02
KeyPadAuto
Pt01
Pt07DeviceOut
Pt15DeviceOut
Pt06DeviceOut
Pt14DeviceOut
Pt05DeviceOut
Pt13DeviceOut
Pt04DeviceOut
Pt12DeviceOut
Pt03DeviceOut
Pt11DeviceOut
An00DeviceOut (low byte)
An00DeviceOut (high byte)
Parameter 1 – PhaseL1Current
Parameter 2 – PhaseL2Current
Pt02DeviceOut
Pt10DeviceOut
Pt01DeviceOut
Pt09DeviceOut
Bit 0
TripPresent
DLXEnabled
Pt00
Pt00DeviceOut
Pt08DeviceOut
Parameter 3 – PhaseL3Current
Parameter 4 – AverageCurrent
Parameter 5 – %ThermalUtilized
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
201
Appendix B
CIP Information
28
29
26
27
24
25
22
23
Instance 152 "Starter Stat" – DeviceLogix Produced Assembly for Bulletin 290E/291E Starters
Parameter 11 – SwitchedVolts
OutputSourceV (IPS units)
Parameter 12 – UnswitchedVolts
SensorSourceV (IPS units)
Parameter 16 – TripStatus
Parameter 17 – WarningStstus
Instance 154
Instance 154 is the default Output (Consumed) Assembly for Inverter type
(Bulletin 294E) Distributed Starters.
5
6
3
4
7
Byte Bit 7
Instance 154 "Drive Cmd" – DeviceLogix Consumed Assembly for Bulletin 294E Starters
Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4
0 JogReverse
Bit 3
JogForward
Bit 2
ResetFault
Bit 1
RunReverse
1 Decel2
2
Accel2 Out05 Out04 Out03
CommandFreq (Low) (xxx.x Hz)
Out02 Out01
Pt07DeviceIn
Pt15DeviceIn
Pt06DeviceIn
Pt14DeviceIn
Pt05DeviceIn
Pt13DeviceIn
CommandFreq (High) (xxx.x Hz)
Pt04DeviceIn
Pt12DeviceIn
Pt03DeviceIn
Pt11DeviceIn
An00DeviceIn (lowbyte)
An00DeviceIn (highbyte)
Pt02DeviceIn
Pt10DeviceIn
Pt01DeviceIn
Pt09DeviceIn
Bit 0
RunFoward
Out00
Pt00DeviceIn
Pt08DeviceIn
Instance 156
Instance 156 is the Exhaustive Drive Status Assembly Instance
5
6
3
4
9
10
7
8
Byte Bit 7 Bit 6
Instance 156 "Drive Status" – Produced Assembly for Bulletin 294E Starters
Bit 5 Bit 4
0 Reserved
Bit 3 Bit 2
1 Reserved
2 Reserved
AtReference
BrakeStatus
NetRefStatus
DisconnectClosed
NetControlStatus
Pt05
Ready
Reserved
RunningReverse RunningForward WarningPresent
KeyPadJogging KeyPadHand
Output Frequency (Low) (xxx.x Hz)
KeyPadOff KeyPadAuto
Output Frequency (High) (xxx.x Hz)
Pt04 Pt03 Pt02
Bit 1
Pt01
Pt07DeviceOut Pt06DeviceOut Pt05DeviceOut Pt04DeviceOut Pt03DeviceOut Pt02DeviceOut Pt01DeviceOut
Bit 0
TripPresent
DLXEnabled
Pt00
Pt00DeviceOut
202
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
CIP Information
Appendix B
25
26
23
24
21
22
19
20
17
18
15
16
13
14
11
12
31
32
33
29
30
27
28
Instance 156 "Drive Status" – Produced Assembly for Bulletin 294E Starters
Pt15DeviceOut Pt14DeviceOut Pt13DeviceOut Pt12DeviceOut Pt11DeviceOut Pt10DeviceOut Pt09DeviceOut Pt08DeviceOut
An00DeviceOut (low byte)
An00DeviceOut (high byte)
Parameter 3 – OutputCurrent
Parameter 4 – OutputVoltage
Parameter 5 – DCBusVoltage
Parameter 11 – SwitchedVolts
OutputSourceV (IPS units)
Parameter 12 – UnswitchedVolts
SensorSourceV (IPS units)
Parameter 13 – InternalFanRPM
Parameter 14 – ElaspedRunTime
Parameter 15 – DriveTemperature
Parameter 16 – TripStatus
Parameter 17 – WarningStatus
Connection Manager Object CLASS CODE 0x0006
Attribute ID
1
2
3
4
5
6
Access Rule
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
No class attributes will be supported for the Connection Manager Object.
One Instance of the Connection Manager Object will be supported. It has the following attributes:
Name
Open Requests
Open Format Rejects
Open Resource Rejects
Open Other Rejects
Close Requests
Close Format Requests
Data Type
UINT
UINT
UINT
UINT
UINT
UINT
Value
Number of Forward Open service requests received
Number of Forward Open service requests which were rejected due to bad format
Number of Forward Open service requests which were rejected due to lack of resources
Number of Forward Open service requests rejected for reasons other than bad format or lack of resources.
Number of Forward Close service requests received
Number of Forward Close service requests which were rejected due to bad format
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
203
Appendix B
CIP Information
Attribute ID
7
8
9
11
12
13
Access Rule
Set
Set
Get
Name
Close Other Requests
Connection Timeouts
Connection Entry Lists
NumConnEntries
Get
Get
Get
ConnOpenBits
CPU_Utilization
MaxBuffSize
BufSize Remaining
Data Type
UINT
UINT
Struct of
UINT
Array of BOOL
UINT
UDINT
UDINT
Value
Number of Forward Close service requests which were rejected for reasons other than bad format
Total number of connection timeouts that have occurred
Number of connection entries. This attribute, divided by 8 and rounded up for any remainder, gives the length of the array (in bytes) of the ConnOpenBits field of this structure.
List of connections. Each bit represents a possible connection.
CPU Utilization in tenths of a percent
Amount of buffer space (in bytes) originally available
Amount of buffer space (in bytes) available at this time
Class 1 Connections
Class 1 connections are used to transfer I/O data, and can be established to the assembly object instances. Each Class 1 connection establishes two data transports, one consuming and one producing. The heartbeat instances are used for connections that shall access only inputs. Class 1 uses UDP transport.
•
Total numbers of supported Class 1 connections equals 4
(Total for: exclusive owner + input only + listen only)
•
Supported API: 2
…
3200 ms
•
T->O Connection type: Point-to-point, multicast
•
O->T Connection type: Point-to-point
•
Supported trigger type: Cyclic, Change-of-state
When all supported connections are used the error code “Connection Manager cannot support any more connections” shall be returned.
Exclusive Owner Connection
This connection type is used for controlling the outputs of the module and shall not be dependent on any other connection. Only one exclusive owner connection can be opened against the module.
If an exclusive owner connection is already opened “Connection in Use” (General
Status = 0x01, Extend Status = 0x0100) shall be returned an error code.
•
Connection point O -> T shall be Assembly object, Instance 3, 150, or 154
•
Connection point T -> O shall be Assembly object, Instance 52, 152, or
156
204
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
CIP Information
Appendix B
Input Only Connection
This connection is used to read data from the module without controlling the outputs. This connection type shall not be dependent on any other connection. It is recommended that the originator sets the data size in the O->T direction of the
Forward_Open be zero, there are however no check that this is actually the case.
IMPORTANT
If an exclusive owner connection has been opened against the module and times out, the input only connection shall time out as well. If the exclusive owner connection is properly closed, the input only connection shall not be affected.
•
Number of supported input only connections equals four (shared with exclusive owner and listen only connection).
Listen Only Connection
This connection is dependent on another connection to exist. If that connection
(Exclusive owner or Input only) is closed, the listen only connection shall be closed as well.
It is recommended that the originator sets the data size in the O->T direction of the Forward_Open be zero, there are however no checks that this is actually the case.
If no other connection exists when listen only tries to be opened, a “Controlling connection not open (general status = 0x01, extend status = 0x0119)” error message shall be sent.
•
Number of supported listen only connections equals four (shared with exclusive owner and input only connection).
Class 3 Connections
Explicit Message Connection
Class 3 connections are used to establish connections to the message router.
Thereafter the connection is used for explicit messaging. Class 3 connections use
TCP connections.
•
16 concurrent Class 3 connections will be supported
Service Code
0x01
0x0e
Class
Implemented for:
Instance
No
No
Yes
Yes
Service Name
Get_Attribute_All
Get_Attribute_Single
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
205
Appendix B
CIP Information
Discrete Input Point
Object
Attribute ID
1
2
Access Rule
Get
Get
Attribute ID
3
4
115
116
Access Rule
Get
Get
Get/Set
Get/Set
Discrete Output Point
Object
Attribute ID Access Rule
1 Get
2 Get
Service Code
0x10
0x4E
0x54
Class
Implemented for:
Instance
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Service Name
Set_Attribute_Single
Forward_Close
Forward_Open
CLASS CODE 0x0008
The following class attributes are currently supported for the Discrete Input
Point Object:
Name
Revision
Max Instance
Data Type
UINT
UINT
Value
2
6
Six instances of the Discrete Input Point Object are supported. All instances contain the following attributes:
Name
Value
Fault Status
Force Enable
Force Value
Data Type
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Value
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
0 = OK, 1 = Fault
0 = Disable, 1 = Enable
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
The following common services will be implemented for the Discrete Input Point
Object:
Service Code
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class Instance Service Name
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
CLASS CODE 0x0009
fo
The following class attributes are supported:
Name
Revision
Max Instance
Data Type
UINT
UINT
Value
1
8 for Bulletin 290E/291E, 10 for Bulletin 294E
206
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
CIP Information
Appendix B
6
7
4
5
Instance Name
1 Run Fwd Output
2
3
Run Rev Output
User Output A
User Output B
User Output C
User Output D
User Output E
8
9
10
User Output F
Drive Jog Fwd
Drive Jog Rev
Eight instances of the Discrete Output Point Object are supported for DOL/
Reverser (Bulletin 290E/291E) units. Ten instances are supported for Drive
(Bulletin 294E) units. The following table summarizes the DOP (Bulletin 290E/
291E) instances:
Description
0029-01-03
0029-01-04
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Run Forward output.
Run Reverse output.
These are the six ArmorStart LT user outputs for all starter types. Their fault/ idle behavior is defined in DOP Instance 3.
This instances exists for Inverter (Bulletin 294E) units only.
Attribute ID
3
Access Rule
Get
All instances contain the following attribute:
Name
Value BOOL
Data Type
0 = OFF, 1 = ON
Value
The following common services will be implemented for the Discrete Output
Point Object:
Service Code
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class Instance Service Name
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
Discrete Output Point Object Special Requirements
There are many sources that can affect an output point's value: an I/O message, an explicit message, local logic, network fault and idle conditions, and protection fault conditions. An output point must know how to select which source of data to use to drive its value attribute.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
207
Appendix B
CIP Information
Power off
The following state transition diagram is used for an unbound Bulletin 290E
Figure 63 - State Transition for Unbound Bulletin 290E
Non-Existent
Power up
Available
Connection
Transitions to
Established
Protection Fault
DNet Fault
Ready
Idle DNet Fault
Protection
Fault
Connection Transitions to Established
DNet Fault
Receive Idle
DNet
Idle
Ready
Receive
Data
Run
Protection Fault Reset
Protection Fault
Protection Fault
Protection
Fault
DNet Fault
208
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
CIP Information
Appendix B
The following flow chart illustrates the behavior of
Bound DOPs
Figure 64 - State Transition for Bound Bulletin 290E
Protection
Fault
Yes
Pr Fault
Action = Ignore
Yes
Unrecoverable
Network
Fault
Yes
Return Object State
Conflict
Yes
Ignore
Message
Yes
EM
I/O
Comm
Override
Yes
Yes
Network
Fault
Override
DN
Fault
Yes
DN Idle
Yes
Run
Yes
Use PrFault Action &
PrFault Value
Available
Yes
Clear Value
Logic
Enabled
Yes
Perform LEO
Function
Apply Force Value
Use DNIdle Action &
DNIdle Value
Use DNFault Action
& DNFault Value
Apply Value
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
209
Appendix B
CIP Information
Protection
Fault
The following flow chart illustrates the behavior of
Bound DOP Instances
.
Figure 65 - State Transition for Bound Bulletin 290E
Yes
Unrecoverable
Network
Fault
Yes
Return Object State
Conflict
Yes
Ignore
Message
Yes
EM
I/O
Yes
Comm
Override
DN
Fault
Yes
DN Idle
Yes
Run
Y es
Yes
Network
Fault
Override
Available
Yes
Clear Value
Logic
Enabled
Yes
Perform LEO
Function
Apply Force Value
Apply Value
Use DNIdle Action &
DNIdle Value
Use DNFault Action
& DNFault Value
Turn off output
210
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
CIP Information
Appendix B
Analog Input Point Object CLASS CODE 0x000A (Implemented in Bulletin 294E units only)
Attribute ID
1
2
Access Rule
Get
Get
The following class attributes will be supported for the Analog Input Point
Object:
Name
Revision
Max Instance
Data Type
UINT
UINT
Value
2
1
Attribute ID
1
Access Rule
Get
One instance of the Analog Input Point Object will supported. CommandFreq from Assembly 154 is placed in the value attribute when it is consumed.
Name
Value
Data Type
INT
Value
0 = Default
The following common services will be implemented for the Analog Input Point
Object:
Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance
0x0E Yes Yes
Service Name
Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single
Analog Output Point Object CLASS CODE 0x000B (Implemented in Bulletin 294E units only)
Attribute ID
1
2
Access Rule
Get
Get
The following class attributes will be supported for the Analog Output Point
Object:
Name
Revision
Max Instance
Data Type
UINT
UINT
Value
2
1
Attribute ID
3
Access Rule
Get/Set
129 Get/Set
One instance of the Analog Output Point object will supported. It will represent the Frequency command sent to the PF40 via the DSI link. CommandFreq from
Assembly 154 is placed in the Value Attribute when it is consumed. The Value
Attribute can then be overwritten by DeviceLogix.
Name
Value
Input Binding
INT
Data Type
STRUCT:
USINT
Array of USINT
Value
0 = Default
Size of Appendix I encoded path
Appendix I encoded path
NULL path means attribute 3 drives the output.
Otherwise, this is a path to a bit in the Bit Table.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
211
Appendix B
CIP Information
The following common services will be implemented for the Analog Output
Point Object:
Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance
0x0E Yes Yes
Service Name
Get_Attribute_Single
0x10 No Yes Set_Attribute_Single
Parameter Object
Attribute ID
1
2
8
9
Access Rule
Get
Get
Get
Get
Attribute ID
1
2
Access Rule
Get/Set
Get
3
10
11
8
9
6
7
4
5
14
15
12
13
16
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
CLASS CODE 0x000F
The following class attributes will be supported for the Parameter Object:
Name
Revision
Max Instance
Parameter Class Descriptor
Configuration Assembly Instance
Data Type
UINT
UINT
WORD
UINT
Value
—
—
—
100 for Bulletin 290E/291E units
101 for Bulletin 294E units
The number of instances of the parameter object will depend upon the type of
Distributed Starter that the control board is connected to.
Descriptor
Data Type
Data Size
Parameter Name String
Units String
Help String
Minimum Value
Maximum Value
Default Value
Scaling Multiplier
Scaling Divisor
Scaling Base
Scaling Offset
The following instance attributes will be implemented for all parameter attributes:
Name
Value
Link Path Size
Link Path
Data Type
Specified in Descriptor
USINT
Array of:
BYTE
EPATH
WORD
EPATH
USINT
SHORT_STRING
SHORT_STRING
SHORT_STRING
Specified in Descriptor
Specified in Descriptor
Specified in Descriptor
UINT
UINT
UINT
INT
Value
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
212
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Attribute ID
17
18
19
20
21
Access Rule
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
CIP Information
Appendix B
Name
Multiplier Link
Divisor Link
Base Link
Offset Link
Decimal Precision
UINT
UINT
UINT
UINT
USINT
Data Type Value
—
—
—
—
—
The following services will be implemented for the Parameter Object:
Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance
0x01 No Yes
Service Name
Get_Attribute_All
0x0E Yes
0x10 No
0x4b No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
Get_Enum_String
Parameter Group Object
Attribute ID
1
2
Access Rule
Get
Get
Attribute ID
1
2
3
4 n
Access Rule
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
CLASS CODE 0x0010
The following class attributes will be supported for the Parameter Group Object:
Name
Revision
Max Instance
Data Type
UINT
UINT
Value
—
—
The following instance attributes will be supported for all Parameter Group
Instances.
Name
Group Name String
Number of Members
1st Parameter
2nd Parameter
Nth Parameter
Data Type
SHORT_STRING
UINT
UINT
UINT
UINT
Value
—
—
—
—
—
The following common services will be implemented for the Parameter Group
Object.
Implemented for:
Service Code Class Instance
0x01 Yes Yes
Service Name
Get_Attribute_All
0x0E Yes Yes Get_Attribute_Single
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
213
Appendix B
CIP Information
Discrete Input
Group Object
Attribute ID
3
4
6
7
Access Rule
Get
Get
Get/Set
Get/Set
CLASS CODE 0x001D
No class attributes will be supported for the Discrete Input Group (DIP) Object.
A single instance of the Discrete Input Group Object is supported and contains the following instance attributes:
Name
Number of Instances
Binding
Off_On_Delay
On_Off_Delay
Data Type
USINT
Array of UINT
UINT
UINT
Value
6
List of DIP Instances
—
—
The following common services will be implemented for the Discrete Input
Group Object:
Service Code
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class Instance Service Name
No
No
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
Discrete Output
Group Object
Attribute ID
3
4
6
104
105
Access Rule
Get
Get
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
CLASS CODE 0x001E
No class attributes will be supported for the Discrete Output Group (DOP) object.
Instance 1
…
3 exists for all ArmorStart LT units.
Instance 1 exists for the sole purpose of providing a place holder for the Comm
Override and Network Override parameters. Instance 1 will contain the following attributes:
Name
Number of Instances
Binding
Command
Network Status Overrride
Comm Status Overrride
Data Type
USINT
Array of UINT
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Value
8 for DOL/Soft Starter (Bulletin 290E/291E)
12 for Inverters (Bulletin 294E)
List of DOP Instances
0 = Idle, 1 = Run
0 = No override (go to safe state)
1 = Override (run local logic)
0 = No Override (go to safe state)
1 = Override (run local logic)
Instance 2 controls the communication fault and idle behaviors for run/jog outputs. Instance 2 contains the following instance attributes:
214
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
CIP Information
Appendix B
Attribute ID
3
4
8
9
6
7
10
Access Rule
Get
Get
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Attribute ID
3
4
6
9
10
7
8
113
114
Access Rule
Get
Get
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Name
Number of Instances
Binding
Command
Fault Action
Fault Value
Idle Action
Idle Value
Data Type
USINT
Array of UINT
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Value
2 for DOLs (Bulletin 290E/291E)
4 for Drives (Bulletin 294E)
1, 2 for DOLs (Bulletin 290E/291E)
1, 2, 9, 10 for Drives (Bulletin 294E)
0 = Idle, 1 = Run
0 = Fault Value Attribute, 1 = Hold Last State
0 = OFF, 1 = On
0 = Idle Value Attribute, 1 = Hold Last State
0 = OFF, 1 = On
Note:
There are no protection fault attributes. Behavior for protection faults is go to OFF.
Instance 3 will drive protection fault and communication fault/idle behaviors for user outputs. Instance 3 will have the following attributes.
Name
Number of Instances
Binding
Command
Fault Action
Fault Value
Idle Action
Idle Value
Pr Fault Action
Pr Fault Value
Data Type
USINT
Array of UINT
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
Value
6
3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
0 = Idle, 1 = Run
0 = Fault Value Attribute, 1 = Hold Last State
0 = OFF, 1 = On
0 = Idle Value Attribute, 1 = Hold Last State
0 = OFF, 1 = On
0 = Pr Fault Value Attribute, 1 = Ignore
0 = OFF, 1 = On
The following common services are implemented for the Discrete Input Group
Object.
Service Code
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class Instance Service Name
No
No
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
Control Supervisor Object CLASS CODE 0x0029
No class attributes are supported.
A single instance (Instance 1) of the Control Supervisor Object is supported and contains the following instance attributes.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
215
Appendix B
CIP Information
Attribute ID
3
4
➊
7
8
➊
9
10
12
Access Rule
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get/Set
Name
Run 1
Run 2
Running 1
Running 2
Ready
Tripped
Fault Reset
Data Type
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL
BOOL 0 > 1 = Trip Reset
➊
Reversing Starters (291E) and Inverter (294E) Starters only
Value
These Run outputs also map to DOP Instances 1 and 2
—
—
—
—
The following common services will be implemented for the Control Supervisor
Object.
Service Code
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class Instance Service Name
No
No
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
Overload Object
Attribute ID
3
4
5
9
10
7
8
190
192
193
194
195
Access Rule
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get/Set
Get
Get
Get
Get
CLASS CODE 0x002C
No class attributes will be supported for the Overload Object.
A single instance (Instance 1) of the Overload Object is supported for DOL
(Bulletin 290E/291E) and Reversing (Bulletin 294E) Starters. Instance 1 contains the following instance attributes.
Name
FLA Setting
Trip Class
Average Current
% Thermal Utilized
Current L1
Current L2
Current L3
FLA Setting Times 10
Average Current Times 10
Current L1 Times 10
Current L2 Times 10
Current L3 Times 10
Data Type
BOOL
USINT
INT
USINT
INT
INT
INT
BOOL
UINT
UINT
UINT
UINT
Value
xxx.x amps
— xxx.x amps xxx% FLA xxx.x Amps xxx.xx Amps
216
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
CIP Information
Appendix B
The following common services are implemented for the Overload Object.
Service Code
0x01
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class Instance Service Name
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_All
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
Device Level Ring (DLR)
Object
Attribute ID
1
Access Rule
Get
Attribute ID
1
Access Rule
Get
2
10
12
Get
Get
Get
CLASS CODE 0x0047
The following class attribute will be supported for the DLR Object.
Name
Revision
Data Type
UINT
Value
2
A single instance (instance 1) will be supported.
Name
Network Topology
Network Status
USINT
Data Type
USINT
Value
0 = Linear
1 = Ring
0 = Normal
1 = Ring Fault
2 = Unexpected Loop Detect
3 = Partial Network Fault
4 = Rapid Fault/Restore Cycle
Active Supervisor Address
Capability Flags
Struct of:
UDINT
Array of 6
USINT
DWORD
Ring Supervisor
0x00000002
The following common services will be implemented for the DLR Object.
Service Code
0x01
0x0E
Implemented for:
Class Instance Service Name
No
No
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_All
Get_Attribute_Single
Extended Device Object
Attribute ID
1
Access Rule
Get
CLASS CODE 0x0064
The following class attributes will be supported for the Extended Device Object.
Name
Revision
Data Type
UINT
Value
2
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
217
Appendix B
CIP Information
Attribute ID
1
2
3
101
102
Access Rule
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
A single instance (instance 1) will be supported.
Name
Name
Description
Geographic Location
Contacxts 1
Contacts 2
Data Type
STRING
STRING
STRING
STRING
STRING
Value
User Assigned Name – Defaults to a null. 32 chars max
User Assigned Description – Defaults to a null. 64 chars max
User Assigned Geographic Loc. – Defaults to null. 32 chars max
Contacts String – Defaults to a null. – 80 chars max.
Contacts String – Defaults to a null. – 80 chars max.
The following common services will be implemented for the Extended Device
Object.
Service Code
0x01
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class Instance Service Name
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_All
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
DPI Fault Object
Attribute ID
1
2
3
4
5
6
CLASS CODE 0x0097
Access Rule
Get
Get
Get/Set
Get
Get
Get
This object provides access to fault information within the device.
The following class attributes will be supported for the DPI Fault Object.
Name
Class Revision
Number of Instances
Fault Cmd Write
Fault Instance Read
UINT
UINT
USINT
UINT
Data Type
Fault into parameter instance array
Struct of:
UINT
Array [5] of UINT
Number of Recorded Faults UINT
Value
1
4
0=NOP; 1=Clear Fault; 2=Clear Flt Queue
The instance of the Fault Queue Entry containing information about the fault that tripped the device.
Array of SnapShot parameter instance numbers
Array Size = 5
Array of Instance Numbers = 23,24,25,26,27
The number of faults recorded in the fault queue.
218
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
CIP Information
Appendix B
Attribute ID
0
1
3
Access Rule
Get
Name
Full/All Info
Fault Code
Fault Source
DPI Port Number
Device Object Instance
Fault Text
Fault Time Stamp
Timer Value
Timer Descriptor
Help Object Instance
Fault Data
Get
Get
Four instances of the DPI Fault Object will be supported.
Value
Basic Info
Fault Code
Fault Source
DPI Port Number
Device Object Instance
Fault Time Stamp
Timer Value
Timer Descriptor
Help Text
Data Type
Struct of:
UINT
Struct of:
USINT
USINT
BYTE [16]
Struct of:
USINT
Array [5] of 32 bit fault data values
ULDINT
WORD
See Tables below
0
See Tables below
Snapshot data
Struct of:
UINT
Struct of:
USINT
USINT
Struct of:
ULINT
WORD
STRING
See Tables below
0
See Tables below
The following common services will be implemented for the DPI Fault Object.
Service Code
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class Instance Service Name
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
The table below lists Fault Codes, Fault Text, and Fault Help Strings for DOL and Reversers.
Table 33 - Fault Codes, Fault Text, and Fault Help Strings for DOL and Reversers
11
12
13
9
10
7
8
5
6
3
4
Fault
Code
1
2
Fault Text
Fault 1
User Defined
Overload Trip
Fault 4
Phase Loss Trip
Jam Trip
Underload Trip
Fault 8
Fault 9
Fault 10
Fault 11
Stall Trip
Switched Power
Help Text
—
User defined trip has occurred.
Load has drawn excessive current based on trip class selected.
—
Indicates missing supply phase. This fault can be disabled.
Motor current above jam level for more than jam trip delay time.
Motor current below UL level for more than UL trip delay time.
—
—
—
—
Motor current above stall trip level during motor starting.
Indicates the loss of switched control power.
Not available in units with Integrated Power Supply.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
219
Appendix B
CIP Information
220
Table 33 - Fault Codes, Fault Text, and Fault Help Strings for DOL and Reversers
Fault
Code
14
36
37
34
35
32
33
30
31
38
39
40
28
29
26
27
24
25
22
23
19
20
21
17
18
15
16
Fault Text
Under Power Trip
Sensor Short
Output Short
Fault 17
Fault 18
Phase Imbalance
Fault 20
Aux Power Loss
Fault 22
Fault 23
Fault 24
Fault 25
Fault 26
NonVol Memory
Fault 28
Fault 29
Hardware Fault
Fault 31
Fault 32
Fault 33
Fault 34
Fault 35
Fault 36
Fault 37
Fault 38
Fault 39
Unknown Fault
Help Text
Indicates the internal power supply is below its working level.
Available in units with Integrated Power Supply only
Flags a miswired hardware input point.
Flags a miswired hardware output point.
—
—
Indicates an imbalanced phase current.
—
Auxiliary Power was lost or dipped below the minimum threshold.
Not available in units with Integrated Power Supply
—
—
—
—
—
This is a major fault which renders the unit inoperable.
—
—
This is a major fault which renders the unit inoperable.
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
The table below lists Fault Codes, Fault Text, and Fault Help Strings for Drive units.
Table 34 - Fault Codes, Fault Text, and Fault Help Strings for Drive Units
PF4M
Fault
Code
Fault
Code
1
2
3
4
Fault Text
Fault 1
User Defined
Motor Overload
Drive Overload
Help Text
—
User defined trip has occurred.
The load has drawn excessive current.
150% load for 1 min. or 200% load for 3 sec. exceeded.
7
64
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
CIP Information
Appendix B
19
20
21
17
18
15
16
9
10
7
8
Fault
Code
5
6
11
12
13
36
37
34
35
32
33
30
31
38
39
40
28
29
26
27
24
25
22
23
Table 34 - Fault Codes, Fault Text, and Fault Help Strings for Drive Units
14
Fault Text
Phase U to Gnd
Phase V to Gnd
Phase W to Gnd
Phase UV Short
Phase UW Short
Phase VW Short
Ground Fault
Stall Trip
Switched Power
Under Power Trip
Help Text
A Phase U to Ground fault detected between drive and motor.
A Phase V to Ground fault detected between drive and motor.
A Phase W to Ground fault detected between drive and motor.
Excessive current detected between phases U and V.
Excessive current detected between phases U and W.
Excessive current detected between phases V and W.
A current path to earth ground at one or more output terminals.
The drive is unable to accelerate the motor.
Indicates the loss of switched control power.
Not available in units with Integrated Power Supply
Indicates the internal power supply is below its working level.
Available in units with Integrated Power Supply only.
Flags a miswired hardware input point.
Flags a miswired hardware output point.
Sensor Short
Output Short
Fault 17
Heatsink Temp
HW Over Current
SW OverCurrent
Aux Power Loss
The Heatsink temperature exceeds a predefined value.
The drive output current has exceeded the hardware limit.
Programmed parameter 83 (SW Current Trip) has been exceeded.
Auxiliary Power was lost or dipped below the minimum threshold.
Not available in units with Integrated Power Supply.
Internal Comm Communication with the internal Power Flex drive has been lost.
Drive Comm Loss The RS485 port on the internal Power Flex stopped communicating.
Power Loss
Under Voltage
Drive DC Bus Voltage remained below 85% of nominal bus voltage.
DC Bus Voltage fell below the minimum value.
Over Voltage
MCB EEPROM
Param Sync
Drive EEPROM
DC Bus Voltage exceeded the maximum value.
This is a major fault which renders the ArmorStart inoperable.
The drive and Main Control Board EEPROMS are not in sync.
The drive EEPROM checksum checks have failed.
Hardware Fault
Fan RMP
Power Unit
Drive I/O Brd
This is a major fault which renders the unit inoperable
The internal cooling fan is not running properly.
A major failure has been detected in the drive power section.
A failure has been detected in the drive control and I/O section.
Restart Retries
Drive Aux In Flt
Automatic fault reset and run retries exceeded.
The drive auxiliary input interlock is open inside the ArmorStart.
Fault 36 —
Drv Param Reset Internal Drive Parameters (Parameters > 100) have been defaulted.
Fault 38
Fault 39
Unknown Fault
—
—
—
42
43
40
41
PF4M
Fault
Code
38
39
13
6
100
48
8
12
63
3
4
71
81
5
70
122
33
2
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
221
Appendix B
CIP Information
DPI Alarm Object
Attribute ID
1
2
3
74
6
Attribute ID
0
1
3
Access Rule
Get
Get
Set
Get
Get
CLASS CODE 0x0098
This object provides access to warning information within the device.
The following class attributes will be supported.
Name
Class Revision
Number of Instances
Alarm Cmd Write
Alarm Instance Read
Number of Recorded Alarms
UINT
UINT
USINT
UINT
UINT
Data Type Value
1
1
0=NOP; 1=Clear Alarm; 2=Clear Queue
The instance of the Fault Queue Entry containing information about the fault that tripped the device.
The number of faults recorded in the fault queue.
A single instance of the DPI Alarm Object will be supported.
Value Access Rule
Get
Get
Get
Name
Full/All Info
Alarm Code
Alarm Source
DPI Port Number
Device Object Instance
Alarm Text
Alarm Time Stamp
Timer Value
Timer Descriptor
Help Object Interface
Alarm Data
Basic Info
Alarm Code
Alarm Source
DPI Port Number
Device Object Instance
Alarm Time Stamp
Timer Value
Timer Descriptor
Help Text
Data Type
Struct of:
UINT
Struct of:
USINT
USINT
STRING
Struct of:
ULINT
WORD
USINT
Struct of:
UINT
Struct of:
USINT
USINT
Struct of:
ULINT
WORD
STRING
See Tables below
0
See Tables below
See Tables below
0
See Tables below
The following common services will be implemented for the DPI Fault Object.
Service Code
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class Instance Service Name
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
The table below lists Fault Codes, Fault Text, and Fault Help Strings.
Table 35 - Fault Codes, Fault Text, and Fault Help Strings for ArmorStart LT
Warning
Code
1
2
3
Warning Text
Warning 1
Warning 2
Motor Overload
Help Text
—
—
Overload warning level has been exceeded.
222
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
CIP Information
Appendix B
Table 35 - Fault Codes, Fault Text, and Fault Help Strings for ArmorStart LT
14
19
20
21
17
18
15
16
Warning
Code
4
5
8
9
6
7
12
13
10
11
Warning Text
Warning 4
Warning 5
Jam Warning
Underload Warning
Warning 8
Warning 9
Warning 10
Warning 11
Warning 12
Switched Pwr Warn
Under Power Warn
Warning 15
Warning 16
Warning 17
Warning 18
Warning 19
Warning 20
Aux Power Warn
Help Text
—
Indicates missing supply phase. This fault can be disabled.
Motor current has exceeded jam warning level.
Motor current dropped below Underload Warning level.
—
—
—
—
—
Indicates the control power has dipped below 19 Volts.
Not available in units with Integrated Power Supply.
Indicates the internal power supply is below its optimal level.
Available in units with Integrated Power Supply only.
—
—
—
—
—
—
Indicates auxiliary Power was has dipped below 19 Volts.
Not available in units with Integrated Power Supply.
TCP/IP Interface Object
Attribute ID
1
Attribute ID
1
2
3
4
Access Rule
Get
CLASS CODE 0x00F5
The following class attributes will be supported.
Name
Revision
Data Type
UINT
Value
2
One Instance of the TCP/IP Interface Object will be supported.
Value Access Rule
Get
Get
Get/Set
Name
Status
Configuration Capability
Configuration Control
DWORD
DWORD
DWORD
Data Type
0x000000F4
0 = Configuration from NVS
2 = Configuration from DHCP
Get Physical Link Object Struct of:
UINT
Padded EPATH
2 words
20 F6 24 01 (Enet Link Object Instance 1)
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
223
Appendix B
CIP Information
Attribute ID
5
6
8
9
10
11
Access Rule
Get/Set
Name
Interface Configuration
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Get/Set
Host Name
TTL Value
Multicast Config
SelectAcd
LastConflictDetected
Data Type
Struct of:
UDINT
UDINT
UDINT
UDINT
UDINT
STRING
STRING
USINT
Structure of
USINT
USINT
UINT
UDINT
BOOL
Structure of
USINT
USINT(6)
USINT(28)
Value
IP Address
Network Mask
Gateway Address
Primary DNS
Secondary DNS
Default Domain Name for not fully qualified host names
Time to Live value for EtherNet/IP multicast packets
Allocation Control
Reserved
Number of multicast addresses to allocate (1-4)
Multicast starting address.
Activates the use of ACD
AcdActivity
RemoteMAC
ArpPdu
The following common services will be implemented for the TCP/IP Interface
Object.
Service Code
0x0E
0x10
0x4C
Implemented for:
Class Instance Service Name
Yes
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
Get_And_Clear
Ethernet Link Object
Attribute ID
1
2
3
Attribute ID
1
2
3
Access Rule
Get
Get
Get
CLASS CODE 0x00F6
The following class attributes will be supported.
Name
Revision
Max Instance
Number of Instances
Data Type
UINT
UINT
UINT
Value
3
2
2
Two instances of the Ethernet Link Object will be supported.
Access Rule
Get
Get
Get
Interface Speed
Name
Interface Flags
Physical Address
Data Type
UDINT
DWORD
ARRAY of 6 USINTs
10 or 100 Mbit/Sec
See ENet/IP Specification
MAC Address
Value
224
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
CIP Information
Appendix B
Attribute ID
4
5
6
9
10
7
8
Access Rule
Get
Name
Interface Counters
Get
Get/Set
Get
Get
Get/Set
Get
Media Counters
Interface Control
Interface Type
Inteface State
Admin State
Interface Label
Data Type
Struct of:
In Octets
In Ucast packets
In NUcast packets
In Discards
In Errors
In Unknown Protos
Out Octets
Out Ucast packets
Out NUcast packets
Out Discards
Out Errors
Struct of:
Alignment Errors
FCS Errors
Single Collisions
SQE Test Errors
Deferred Transmits
Late Collisions
Excessive Collisions
MAC Transmit Errors
Carrier Sense Errors
Frame Too Long
MAC Receive Errors
Struct of:
Control Bits
Forced Interface
Speed
USINT
USINT
USINT
SHORT_STRING
Value
Instance 1:LS 1
Instance 2:LS 2
The following common services will be implemented for the Ethernet Link
Object.
Service Code
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class Instance Service Name
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
225
Appendix B
CIP Information
Trip and Warning
Email Object
Attribute
ID
2
Need in
Implementation
Required
3
5
6
7
13
14
11
12
8
9
10
15
16
17
18
Required
Required
Required
Required
Required
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
Optional
CLASS CODE 0x0376
No class attributes will be supported.
Access
Rule
Set
NV
NV
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Set
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Get
Name Data Type Description of Attribute Semantics of Values
NV
NV
NV
NV
NV
NV
NV
NV
NV Warning Reset Email Mask
V
V
V
V
V
V
To
To Length
To Data
From
From Length
From Data
SMTP Server Address
Addr Length
Addr Data
SMTP User Name
To Length
To Data
SMTP Password
To Length
To Data
SMTP Port
Trip Email Mask
Warning Email Mask
Trip Reset Email Mask
Trip Email Count
Trip Cleared Emails
Warning Email Count
Warning Cleared Emails
Email Send Features
Trip Email Count
Struct of Email address of the recipient of Trip and Warning Emails
UDINT
Array of
USINT
Length of string in bytes
ASCII characters
Struct of Email address of this device
The default value of this string is the null string.
Example: [email protected]
The default value of this string is the null string.
UDINT
Array of
USINT
Length of string in bytes
ASCII characters
Struct of SMTP Server Address String
Example: [email protected]
The default value of this string is the null string.
UDINT
Array of
USINT
Length of string in bytes
ASCII characters
Struct of SMTP User Name String The default value of this string is the null string.
UDINT
Array of
USINT
Length of string in bytes
ASCII characters
Struct of SMTP Password String The default value of this string is the null string.
UDINT
Array of
USINT
UINT
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
UINT
UINT
UINT
UINT
UINT
UINT
Length of string in bytes
ASCII characters
The SMTP Port
Mask to enable emails for individual trip conditions
Mask to enable emails for individual warning conditions
Mask to enable emails when trip conditions are cleared
Mask to enable emails when warning conditions are cleared
Number of emails sent in response to a trip condition
Number of emails sent in response to clearing a trip
Number of emails sent in response to a warningcondition
Number of emails sent in response toclearing a trip
Number of email failures detected
Number of emails sent in response to a trip condition
The Default Value is 0.
Defaults to the value 0
Defaults to the value 0
Defaults to the value 0
Defaults to the value 0
Defaults to the value 0
226
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
CIP Information
Appendix B
The following common services will be implemented for the TCP/IP Interface
Object.
Service Code
0x01
0x0E
0x10
Implemented for:
Class Instance Service Name
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Get_Attribute_All
Get_Attribute_Single
Set_Attribute_Single
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
227
Appendix B
CIP Information
Notes:
228
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Introduction
Appendix
C
Using DeviceLogix™
DeviceLogix is a stand-alone Boolean program that resides within the
ArmorStart LT. The program is embedded in the product so that there is no additional module required to use this technology; DeviceLogix is programmed using the Add-On Profile for RS Logix 5000.
In addition to the actual programming, DeviceLogix can be configured to operate under specific situations. It is important to note that the DeviceLogix program will only run if the logic has been enabled and unswitched power is present. This can be done within the “Logic Editor.” The operation configuration is accomplished by setting the “Network Override” and “Communication
Override” parameter. The following information describes the varying levels of operation:
•
If both overrides are disabled and the logic is enabled, the ONLY time
DeviceLogix will run is if there is an active I/O connection with a master, i.e. the master is in Run mode. At all other times DeviceLogix will be running the logic, but will NOT control the state of the outputs.
•
If the Network Override is enabled and the logic is enabled then
DeviceLogix controls the state of the outputs when the PLC is in Run mode and if a network fault occurs.
•
If the Communications Override is enabled and the logic is enabled, the device does not need any I/O connection to run the logic. As long as there are switched and unswitched power sources connected to the device, the logic will control the state of the outputs.
DeviceLogix Local Control Mode
In local control mode, the embedded DeviceLogix logic engine drives the local outputs and motor run/jog commands from a local DeviceLogix program. Local
Control is completely independent of the any or all CIP connections. I/O and/or
Explicit Message connections can exist in any state and they do not affect the user outputs or the run/jog commands for the motor. Local control mode is chosen by when the keypad “Auto LED” is on, “Network Override” is set “Communication
Override” is set, and DeviceLogix is enabled.
I/O Networked Control Mode
In I/O networked control mode, local outputs and motor run/jog commands are received over a CIP I/O connection in the established state. I/O networked control mode is chosen when DeviceLogix is disabled, or when DeviceLogix is enabled and no user outputs or run commands are being driven in the
DeviceLogix program.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
229
Appendix C
Using DeviceLogix™
DeviceLogix Programming
DeviceLogix has many applications and the implementation is typically only limited to the imagination of the programmer. Keep in mind that the application of DeviceLogix is only designed to handle simple logic routines.
DeviceLogix is programmed using simple Boolean math operators, such as AND,
OR, NOT, timers, counters, latches, and analog values. Decision making is done by combining these Boolean operations with any of the available I/O. The inputs and outputs used to interface with the logic can come from the network or from the device hardware. Hardware I/O is the physical Inputs and Outputs located on the device such as push buttons and pilot lights that are connected to the
ArmotStart LT. Refer to Table 36 - for complete list of DeviceLogix I/O
functions.
There are many reasons to use the DeviceLogix functionality, but some of the most common are listed below:
•
Increased system reliability
•
Fast update times (1 - 2 ms possible)
•
Improved diagnostics and reduced troubleshooting
•
Operation independent of PLC or Network status
•
Continue to run process in the event of network interruptions
•
Critical operations can be safely shutdown through local logic
DeviceLogix Programming Example
The following example will show how to program a simple logic routine to interface the ArmorStart with a remote hard-wired startstop station. In this case the I/O is wired as shown in the table below.
Bit
Pt00
Pt01
Out02
Input/Output Table
Description
Start Button
Stop Button
Run Forward
IMPORTANT
Before programming logic, it is important to decide on the conditions under which the logic will run. The conditions can be defined by setting
CommsOverride and NetworkOverride to the value that you want.
1.
Refer to section “How to Add a New Module, Using the Add-On Profile” to configure the I/O. Then select the DeviceLogix section and create a program.
230
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Using DeviceLogix™
Appendix C
2.
Click on the “
DeviceLogix
” tab. If you are on-line with a device, a dialog box will appear asking you to upload or download. Click on “
Upload
.”
3.
Click the “Start Logic Editor
”
button.
4.
If programming off-line continue to step 5, otherwise click on the “
Edit
” button. Click “
Yes
” when asked if you want to Enter Edit Mode. Once in edit mode the entire list of Function Blocks will be displayed in the toolbar.
5.
Left Click on the “
RSL
” function block. This is a reset dominate latch.
6.
Move the cursor into the grid, and left click to drop the function onto the grid.
7.
From the toolbar, Click on the “
Discrete Input
” button and select
Pt00
from the pull-down menu. This is the remote start button based on the example I/O table.
8.
Place the input to the left of the RSL function. To drop the input on the page, left click on the desired position.
9.
Place the mouse cursor over the tip of Pt00. The tip will turn green. Click on the tip when it turns green.
10.
Move the mouse cursor toward the input of the RSL function. A line will follow the cursor. When a connection can be made, the tip of the RSL function will also turn green. Click the on Input and the line will be drawn from Pt00 to the Set Input of the RSL function.
Note:
If this was not a valid connection, one of the pin tips would have turned red rather than green. Left double clicking on the unused portion of the grid or pressing the “
Esc
” key at any time will cancel the connection process.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
231
Appendix C
Using DeviceLogix™
11.
From the toolbar, Click on the “
Discrete Input
” button and select
Pt01
from the pull-down menu. This is the remote stop button based on the example I/O table.
12.
Place the input to the left of the RSL function.
13.
Connect the input to the reset input of the RSL latch.
14.
From the toolbar, Click on the “
Discrete Output
” button and select
“
RunForward”
from the pull-down menu. RunForward is the relay controlling the coil of the contactor. Click OK.
15.
Move the cursor into the grid and place the Output to the right of the RSL function block.
16.
Connect the output of the “
RSL
” function block to
Run Fwd.
232
17.
Click on the “
Verify
” button located in the toolbar or select “Logic Verify” from the “Tools” pull-down menu.
18.
Click on the “
Edit
” button to toggle out of edit mode if online with a device.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Element Type
Consumed Network Data
Discrete Input Points
Discrete Output Points
Produced Network Data
Using DeviceLogix™
Appendix C
Bulletin 290E
PT00DeviceIn
…
PT15DeviceIn
PT00
…
PT00
RunForward
…
Out00
…
Out05
19.
Go to the pull-down menu in the right corner of the toolbar and select
“
Download
”.
Note:
Ensure that the PLC key switch is in the Program position. If in any other position, the download will not occur and an error will be generated.
20.
Press “
OK
” when told the download was successful.
21.
Now from the same pull-down menu select “
Logic Enable On
.”
22.
The ArmorStart is now programmed and the logic is Active.
Table 36 - DeviceLogix Input and Output Variables
Pt00DeviceOut
…
Pt15DeviceOut
ResetFault
MotionDisable
ForceSnapshot
UserDefinedFault
KeypadDisable
Bulletin 291E
PT00DeviceIn
…
PT15DeviceIn
PT00
…
PT00
RunForward
RunReverse
Out00
…
Out05
Pt00DeviceOut
…
Pt15DeviceOut
ResetFault
MotionDisable
ForceSnapshot
UserDefinedFault
KeypadDisable
Bulletin 294E
PT00DeviceIn
…
PT15DeviceIn
PT00
…
PT00
RunForward
RunReverse
Out00
…
Out05
JogForward
JogReverse
Pt00DeviceOut
…
Pt15DeviceOut
ResetFault
MotionDisable
ForceSnapshot
UserDefinedFault
KeypadDisable
Accel2
Decel2
BrakeRelease
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
233
Appendix C
Using DeviceLogix™
Element Type
Faults
Warnings
Bulletin 290E
OverloadTrip
PhaseShortTrip
UnderPowerTrip
SensorShortTrip
PhaseImbalTrip
NonVolMemooryTrip
JamTrip
StallTrip
UnderloadTrip
OutputShortTrip
UserDefinedTrip
HardwareFltTrip
OverloadWarning
UnderPowerWarn
PhaseImbalWarn
JamWarning
UnderLoadWarn
UnswitchedPwrWarn
Bulletin 291E
OverloadTrip
PhaseShortTrip
UnderPowerTrip
SensorShortTrip
PhaseImbalTrip
NonVolMemooryTrip
JamTrip
StallTrip
UnderloadTrip
OutputShortTrip
UserDefinedTrip
HardwareFltTrip
OverloadWarning
UnderPowerWarn
PhaseImbalWarn
JamWarning
UnderLoadWarn
UnswitchedPwrWarn
Bulletin 294E
OverloadTrip
PhaseShortTrip
UnderPowerTrip
SensorShortTrip
PhaseImbalTrip
NonVolMemooryTrip
ParamSyncTrip
DCBusFaults
StallTrip
UnderloadTrip
GroundFault
RestartRetries
DriveHdwFault
OutputShortTrip
UserDefinedTrip
HardwareFltTrip
OverloadWarning
UnderPowerWarn
UnswitchedPwrWarn
234
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Element Type
Misc Data
Analog Input Point
Analog Output Point
Misc Analog Input Data
Analog Consumed Network Data
Analog Produced Network Data
Bulletin 290E
TripPresent
WarningPresent
RunningForward
RunningReverse
Ready
NetControlStatus
CurrentFlowing
KeyPadAuto
KeyPadOff
KeyPadHand
DisconnectStatus
ExplicitCnxn
IOConnection
ExplicitCnxnFault
IOCnxnFault
IOCnxnIdle
DLREnabled
DLRFault
PhaseL1Current
PhaseL2Current
PhaseL3Current
AverageCurrent
%ThermalUtilized
SwitchedVolts
OutputSourceV
➊
UnswitchedVolts
SensorSourceV
➊
AnalogDeviceIn
AnalogDeviceOut
➊
IPS Units
Bulletin 291E
TripPresent
WarningPresent
RunningForward
RunningReverse
Ready
NetControlStatus
CurrentFlowing
KeyPadAuto
KeyPadOff
KeyPadHand
DisconnectStatus
ExplicitCnxn
IOConnection
ExplicitCnxnFault
IOCnxnFault
IOCnxnIdle
DLREnabled
DLRFault
PhaseL1Current
PhaseL2Current
PhaseL3Current
AverageCurrent
%ThermalUtilized
SwitchedVolts
OutputSourceV
➊
UnswitchedVolts
SensorSourceV
➊
AnalogDeviceIn
AnalogDeviceOut
Using DeviceLogix™
Appendix C
ExplicitCnxn
IOConnection
ExplicitCnxnFault
IOCnxnFault
IOCnxnIdle
DLREnabled
DLRFault
NetInputFreq
CommandFreq
OutputFreq
OutputCurrent
OutputVoltage
DCBusVoltage
DriveTemperature
SwitchedVolts
OutputSourceV
➊
UnswitchedVolts
SensorSourceV
➊
AnalogDeviceIn
AnalogDeviceOut
Bulletin 294E
TripPresent
WarningPresent
RunningForward
RunningReverse
Ready
NetControlStatus
NetRefStatus
AtReference
KeyPadAuto
KeyPadOff
KeyPadHand
KeyPadJogging
DisconnectStatus
BrakeStatus
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
235
Appendix C
Using DeviceLogix™
236
ArmorStart LT Bulletin 294E Example Configuration
Hardware & Software Versions Used in this example
•
RSLogix 5000 Revision 19
•
Download AOP from the Support website:
• http://support.rockwellautomation.com/controlflash/LogixProfiler.asp
•
Hardware:
–
294E-FD2P5Z-G1 — ArmorStart LT
–
1606-XLP72E — Power Supply
–
1783-EMS08TA — Stratix Ethernet switch
–
1756-L63 system set — Control Logix
–
1756-EN2TR — EtherNet/IP module for Control Logix
•
The IP address of the Hardware will be preset to as followed:
Item
1
2
3
Description
ArmorStart LT
1756-EN2TR
PC
•
The Armorstart LT control power wiring example used
Figure 1: Control Power Wiring Example
IP Address
192.168.1.36
192.168.1.32
192.168.1.89
L1 L2 L3
Off
Switched Control Power
Unswitched Control Power
Disconnect
Motor
Controller
T1 T2 T3
A1
A2
A3
EtherNet
Comms
Inputs Outputs
ArmorStart
LT
Motor
Control
* Control power output is determined by disconnect status
L
N
24VDC
+
-
Class 2
External
24VDC Power
Supply
Single External Power Supply
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Download the AOP
Using DeviceLogix™
Appendix C
Download and install the AOP for RSLOGIX5000 from the Service and
Support website.
1.
Open an Internet Explorer and enter the following URL: http://support.rockwellautomation.com/controlflash/LogixProfiler.asp
2.
From the list of the Add-On I/O Modules Profiles, scroll down and select
Bulletin 290E, 291E, 294E ArmorStart LT from the list and download the file.
3.
To download the file, your RSLOGIX 5000 Serial Number will be prompted. Enter the Serial Number and click on the ‘Qualify For Update’ button to proceed.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
237
Appendix C
Using DeviceLogix™
4.
Upon verification, the following screen will appear. Click on the link to download the file.
5.
At the pop-up dialogue box, select ‘Save’ to save the file.
6.
Select the folder to save the file and click ‘Save’. The downloading will start.
238
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Using DeviceLogix™
Appendix C
7.
Upon the completion of downloading, unzip the files to the folder.
8.
Run the MPSetup.exe from the folder and start installation.
9.
The following dialog box will appear.
10.
The RSLogix 5000 Module Profiles Setup window will be shown. Click
‘Next’ to continue.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
239
Appendix C
Using DeviceLogix™
11.
Select ‘I accept the terms in the license agreement’ and click on ‘Next’
12.
Then click on ‘Next’ to proceed to installation
240
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
13.
Select ‘Install’ to start installation
Using DeviceLogix™
Appendix C
14.
The profiles will be installed, upon completion, click on ‘Next’ to proceed
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
241
Appendix C
Using DeviceLogix™
15.
To complete, click on ‘Finish’
Use of the AOP in RSLogix 5000
1.
Start the RSLogix5000 from Start
➔
Rockwell Software
➔
RSLogix 5000
Enterprise Series
➔
RSLogix 5000
2.
Start a new project, by clicking on the icon
242
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Using DeviceLogix™
Appendix C
3.
In the controller dialog box, enter the appropriate information of the controller. Then click ‘OK’ to proceed
4.
In the Controller Organizer window find “I/O Configuration” and right click on the 1756 Backplane and select New module
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
243
Appendix C
Using DeviceLogix™
5.
Select Module Dialog box followed by “Communications” and then select
1756-EN2TR and click OK
6.
In the New module dialog box enter the Unit name, IP address, and slot then click OK
244
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Using DeviceLogix™
Appendix C
7.
Right click on the EN2TR-32, in the Controller Organizer at the I/O
Configuration
➔
1756-Backplane
➔
1756-EN2TR, select ‘New
Module…’
8.
In the Select Module window select “Other” and choose the
294E-FD2P5Z and click on OK
Note
: Please select the appropriate module. If the wrong module is selected once
RSLOGIX 5000 is in Online with the controller a yellow triangle will appear next to the module indicating an I/O error has occurred.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
245
Appendix C
Using DeviceLogix™
9.
In the New Module window, enter the Name of the Armorstart LT and the
IP address assigned to it. You can now start to configure the ArmorStart
LT. Begin with “Motor Protection & Control”
10.
At the Motor Protection & Control, enter the motor information.
Note:
Please refer to the motor nameplate for the information.
246
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Using DeviceLogix™
Appendix C
11.
Next select “Speed Control”. By default “Speed Reference” is set to select
Logix. The speed of the motor will be control by the controller tag in the
Contrologix. Configure the Acceleration/Deceleration and Jog Frequency here.
12.
Then proceed to the “Fault Configuration” and configure the reset mode to Automatic or Manual. Then click OK to proceed.
13.
Download the configuration to the controller. To download, select
Communication
➔
Who Active.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
247
Appendix C
Using DeviceLogix™
14.
At the Who Active window select the 1756-EN2TR, then the controller, and click on the Download button
15.
The Download dialog box will appear, click on Download to proceed
16.
The configuration will be downloaded and the Downloading dialog box will show the progress
17.
Upon completion, select Run Mode as per shown
248
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Using DeviceLogix™
Appendix C
18.
Double click on the Armorstart_LT at the Controller Organizer
19.
Proceed to the Status to check the status of the ArmorStart LT
20.
Double click on the Controller Tags at the Controller Organizer
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
249
Appendix C
Using DeviceLogix™
21.
Expand the output tag of the ArmorStart LT, i.e.: Armorstart_LT_36:O
22.
Enter the following value:
Name
Armorstart_LT_36:O.FreqCommand
Armorstart_LT_36_O.RunForward
Value
300
1
Description
30.0Hz, Setting Target Frequency
Start the RUNning in Forward Direction
23.
Toggle the Armorstart_LT_36_O.RunForward to move the motor in the forward direction. Then toggle Armorstart_LT_36_O.RunReverse. The motor will run in the reverse direction.
24.
Change the value of the FreqCommand to vary the speed.
Note:
Setting the tag value to 500 instructs the drive to run at 50.0Hz
250
This example configuration is now complete. If additional help is needed, please contact your Rockwell Automation sales representative or technical support.
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Rockwell Automation Support
Rockwell Automation provides technical information on the Web to assist you in using its products.
At http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/
, you can find technical manuals, a knowledge base of FAQs, technical and application notes, sample code and links to software service packs, and a MySupport feature that you can customize to make the best use of these tools.
For an additional level of technical phone support for installation, configuration, and troubleshooting, we offer
TechConnect SM support programs. For more information, contact your local distributor or Rockwell Automation representative, or visit http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/
.
Installation Assistance
If you experience a problem within the first 24 hours of installation, review the information that is contained in this manual. You can contact Customer Support for initial help in getting your product up and running.
United States or Canada 1.440.646.3434
Outside United States or Canada Use the Worldwide Locator at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/support/americas/phone_en.html
, or contact your local Rockwell
Automation representative.
New Product Satisfaction Return
Rockwell Automation tests all of its products to ensure that they are fully operational when shipped from the manufacturing facility. However, if your product is not functioning and needs to be returned, follow these procedures.
United States
Outside United States
Contact your distributor. You must provide a Customer Support case number (call the phone number above to obtain one) to your distributor to complete the return process.
Please contact your local Rockwell Automation representative for the return procedure.
Documentation Feedback
Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document, complete this form, publication
RA-DU002
, available at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/
.
Trademark List
Allen-Bradley, ArmorConnect, ArmorStart LT, ControlLogix, CompactLogix, PowerFlex, RSLinx, StepLogic, DeviceLogix, On-Machine, RSNetWorx, and RSLogix 5000, are trademarks of
Rockwell Automation, Inc. Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies
Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş., Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752 İçerenköy, İstanbul, Tel: +90 (216) 5698400
www.rockwel lautomation.com
Power, Control and Information Solutions Headquarters
Americas: Rockwell Automation, 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee, WI 53204-2496 USA, Tel: (1) 414.382.2000, Fax: (1) 414.382.4444
Europe/Middle East/Africa: Rockwell Automation NV, Pegasus Park, De Kleetlaan 12a, 1831 Diegem, Belgium, Tel: (32) 2 663 0600, Fax: (32) 2 663 0640
Asia Pacific: Rockwell Automation, Level 14, Core F, Cyberport 3, 100 Cyberport Road, Hong Kong, Tel: (852) 2887 4788, Fax: (852) 2508 1846
Rockwell Automation Publication 290E-UM001B-EN-P - June 2012
Supersedes Publication 290E-UM001A-EN-P - December 2011 Copyright © 2012 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.

Public link updated
The public link to your chat has been updated.
Advertisement
Key features
- Cost-effective motor control solution
- Integrated safety relay to enhance safety
- Built-in LCD HIM for easy configuration and monitoring
- Embedded web server for remote access and control
- Plug-and-play technology for simplified setup